WO2021115210A1 - 一种触控区域调整方法及装置 - Google Patents

一种触控区域调整方法及装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021115210A1
WO2021115210A1 PCT/CN2020/133997 CN2020133997W WO2021115210A1 WO 2021115210 A1 WO2021115210 A1 WO 2021115210A1 CN 2020133997 W CN2020133997 W CN 2020133997W WO 2021115210 A1 WO2021115210 A1 WO 2021115210A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
contact surface
area
electronic device
touch
screen
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/133997
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
李航
蔡伟纲
张君勇
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202010982063.7A external-priority patent/CN113031802A/zh
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to US17/783,407 priority Critical patent/US11907526B2/en
Priority to JP2022534818A priority patent/JP7478238B2/ja
Priority to EP20899176.0A priority patent/EP4050465A4/en
Publication of WO2021115210A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021115210A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16—Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1626—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers with a single-body enclosure integrating a flat display, e.g. Personal Digital Assistants [PDAs]
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16—Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1633—Constructional details or arrangements of portable computers not specific to the type of enclosures covered by groups G06F1/1615 - G06F1/1626
    • G06F1/1637—Details related to the display arrangement, including those related to the mounting of the display in the housing
    • G06F1/1643—Details related to the display arrangement, including those related to the mounting of the display in the housing the display being associated to a digitizer, e.g. laptops that can be used as penpads
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16—Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1633—Constructional details or arrangements of portable computers not specific to the type of enclosures covered by groups G06F1/1615 - G06F1/1626
    • G06F1/1637—Details related to the display arrangement, including those related to the mounting of the display in the housing
    • G06F1/1652—Details related to the display arrangement, including those related to the mounting of the display in the housing the display being flexible, e.g. mimicking a sheet of paper, or rollable
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16—Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1633—Constructional details or arrangements of portable computers not specific to the type of enclosures covered by groups G06F1/1615 - G06F1/1626
    • G06F1/1684—Constructional details or arrangements related to integrated I/O peripherals not covered by groups G06F1/1635 - G06F1/1675
    • G06F1/1694—Constructional details or arrangements related to integrated I/O peripherals not covered by groups G06F1/1635 - G06F1/1675 the I/O peripheral being a single or a set of motion sensors for pointer control or gesture input obtained by sensing movements of the portable computer
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03—Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041—Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • G06F3/0416—Control or interface arrangements specially adapted for digitisers
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03—Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041—Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • G06F3/0416—Control or interface arrangements specially adapted for digitisers
    • G06F3/0418—Control or interface arrangements specially adapted for digitisers for error correction or compensation, e.g. based on parallax, calibration or alignment
    • G06F3/04186—Touch location disambiguation
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03—Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041—Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • G06F3/044—Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means by capacitive means
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0484—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range
    • G06F3/04847—Interaction techniques to control parameter settings, e.g. interaction with sliders or dials
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0488—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0488—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
    • G06F3/04886—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures by partitioning the display area of the touch-screen or the surface of the digitising tablet into independently controllable areas, e.g. virtual keyboards or menus
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2200/00—Indexing scheme relating to G06F1/04 - G06F1/32
    • G06F2200/16—Indexing scheme relating to G06F1/16 - G06F1/18
    • G06F2200/161—Indexing scheme relating to constructional details of the monitor
    • G06F2200/1614—Image rotation following screen orientation, e.g. switching from landscape to portrait mode
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2203/00—Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/00 - G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/041—Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/041 - G06F3/045
    • G06F2203/04102—Flexible digitiser, i.e. constructional details for allowing the whole digitising part of a device to be flexed or rolled like a sheet of paper
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03—Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041—Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • G06F3/044—Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means by capacitive means
    • G06F3/0446—Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means by capacitive means using a grid-like structure of electrodes in at least two directions, e.g. using row and column electrodes

Definitions

  • This application relates to the technical field of electronic equipment, and in particular to a method and device for adjusting a touch area.
  • embodiments of the present application disclose a touch area adjustment method and device.
  • the present application provides a touch area adjustment method, including: acquiring a first area on the touch display screen of a terminal device where a sensing parameter changes; according to the position of the first area in the touch display screen of the terminal device, Determine the gesture of the terminal device being grasped; according to the gesture of the terminal device being grasped, adjust the position of the touch area in the touch screen of the terminal device to keep the touch area away from the first area.
  • the above method can effectively realize the user's mistouch on the terminal device and improve the user's experience.
  • the sensing parameters include: pressure parameters, temperature parameters, capacitance parameters, and so on. Using different parameters to prevent accidental touch can enhance the accuracy of preventing accidental touch and improve user experience.
  • the first aspect according to the position of the first area in the touch display screen of the terminal device, before determining the gesture that the terminal device is grasped, it further includes calculating the sensing parameters in the first area.
  • the amount of change wherein the first area where the amount of change of the sensing parameter is greater than the first threshold is the first target area.
  • this application provides a terminal device, including: a memory, a processor, and a computer program stored in the memory and running on the processor.
  • the processor executes the computer program, the following steps are performed: The first area on the control display where the sensing parameters change; according to the position of the first area in the touch display screen of the terminal device, determine the gesture of the terminal device being grasped; adjust the touch of the terminal device according to the gesture of the terminal device being grasped The position of the touch area in the display screen is controlled to keep the touch area away from the first area.
  • the sensing parameters include: pressure parameters, temperature parameters, capacitance parameters, and so on. Using different parameters to prevent accidental touch can enhance the accuracy of preventing accidental touch and improve user experience.
  • the second aspect according to the position of the first area in the touch display screen of the terminal device, before determining the gesture that the terminal device is grasped, it further includes calculating the sensing parameters in the first area The amount of change, wherein the first area where the amount of change of the sensing parameter is greater than the first threshold is the first target area.
  • the present application provides a touch area adjustment method, the method includes: the electronic device receives a first touch input acting on the touch screen of the electronic device; the electronic device determines the first touch of the first touch input The touch information of the first contact surface is acquired. The touch information includes capacitance information; based on the touch information of the first contact surface, the electronic device determines the first touch area and the first touch area on the touch screen of the electronic device.
  • Non-touch area wherein the distance between the first touch area and the first contact surface is the first distance value, the first non-touch area includes the first contact surface; the electronic device receives the second touch area acting on the first touch area Touch input; the electronic device displays the first user interface in response to the second touch input; the electronic device receives the third touch input acting on the first non-touch area; the electronic device responds to the third touch input, the electronic device The display content of has not changed.
  • the first touch input may include the touch input of the user holding the mobile terminal.
  • the electronic device may determine the contact surface of the first touch input and obtain the touch information of the contact surface; the electronic device may be based on the contact surface The touch information, adaptively adjust the touch area and non-touch area of the touch screen, and keep the touch area away from the above-mentioned contact surface.
  • the electronic device may respond to the second touch input for the touch area and perform the function corresponding to the touch operation, for example, display the first user interface; the electronic device may respond to the third touch input for the non-touch area, and not The function corresponding to the touch operation is executed, that is, the display content of the electronic device is not changed. In this way, by adaptively adjusting the position of the touch area, the risk of false touches is effectively reduced and the user experience is improved.
  • the first contact surface is located on the first side screen of the touch screen. Based on the touch information of the first contact surface, the above-mentioned electronic device determines the first touch on the touch screen of the electronic device.
  • the control area and the first non-touch area include: based on the touch information of the first contact surface, the electronic device determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area on the first side screen; the touch information is also It may include one or more of the height of the contact surface, the width of the contact surface, and the area of the contact surface.
  • the area outside the first touch area on the first side screen is the first non-touch area. In this way, based on the touch information of at least one contact surface located on a side screen, the electronic device can determine the touch area on the side screen.
  • the first contact surface is located on the first side screen of the touch screen. Based on the touch information of the first contact surface, the above-mentioned electronic device determines the first touch on the touch screen of the electronic device. Before the control area and the first non-touch area, the method further includes: the electronic device determines the second contact surface of the first touch input, and obtains the touch information of the second contact surface, the second contact surface is located on the first side screen; The touch information of the first contact surface.
  • the above-mentioned electronic device determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area on the touch screen of the electronic device, including: touch information based on the first contact surface and the second contact Touch information of the surface, the electronic device determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area on the first side screen, and the distance between the first touch area and the second contact surface is the first distance value;
  • the information may also include one or more of the height of the contact surface, the width of the contact surface, and the area of the contact surface.
  • the area outside the first touch area on the first side screen is the first non-touch area.
  • the electronic device can determine the touch area on the side screen, and the distance between the touch area and the two contact surfaces is the first distance value . This effectively reduces the risk of false touches and improves user experience.
  • the method further includes: The electronic device receives the fourth touch input acting on the touch screen; the electronic device determines the third contact surface of the fourth touch input, and obtains the touch information of the third contact surface; the third contact surface is located on the first touch screen.
  • the touch information can also include one or more of the height of the contact surface, the width of the contact surface, and the area of the contact surface; based on the touch information of the third contact surface, the electronic device determines the The first side screen is a non-touch area; the electronic device receives the fifth touch mode input acting on the first side screen; the electronic device responds to the fifth touch mode input, and the display content of the electronic device does not change. In this way, based on the touch information of at least one contact surface located on a side screen, the electronic device can determine that the side screen is a non-touch area, effectively reducing the risk of false touches.
  • the method further includes: the electronic device determines a fourth touch input And acquire the touch information of the fourth contact surface, the fourth contact surface is located on the first side of the screen; the above-mentioned touch information based on the third contact surface, the electronic device determines the first side on the touch screen
  • the side screen is a non-touch area, including: based on the touch information of the third contact surface and the touch information of the fourth contact surface, the electronic device determines that the first side screen is the non-touch area.
  • the first contact surface is located on the first side screen of the touch screen. Based on the touch information of the first contact surface, the above-mentioned electronic device determines the first touch on the touch screen of the electronic device. Before the control area and the first non-touch area, the method further includes: the electronic device determines the fifth contact surface of the first touch input, and obtains touch information of the fifth contact surface, the fifth contact surface is located on the second side of the touch screen Side screen; based on the touch information of the first contact surface, the above-mentioned electronic device determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area on the touch screen of the electronic device, including: the electronic device based on the touch of the first contact surface Control information, the first touch area and the first non-touch area are determined on the first side screen, and the second touch area is determined on the second side screen based on the touch information of the fifth contact surface And the second non-touch area; the distance between the second touch area and the fifth contact surface is the second distance value, the area outside the first touch area on the
  • the first contact surface is located on the first side screen of the touch screen. Based on the touch information of the first contact surface, the above-mentioned electronic device determines the first touch on the touch screen of the electronic device. Before the control area and the first non-touch area, the method further includes: the electronic device determines the sixth contact surface of the first touch input, and acquires touch information of the sixth contact surface, the sixth contact surface is located on the second side of the touch screen Side screen; based on the touch information of the first contact surface, the electronic device determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area on the touch screen of the electronic device, including: electronic device touch based on the first contact surface Information, the first touch area and the first non-touch area are determined on the first side screen, and the second side screen is determined to be the non-touch area based on the touch information of the sixth contact surface; the first side The area outside the first touch area in the side screen is the first non-touch area.
  • the electronic device determines that one side screen includes the touch area, and the other The side screens are all non-touch areas.
  • the above electronic device determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area on the first side screen, including: When the touch information of the surface meets the first preset condition, the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is a large thenar contact surface; when the distance between the first contact surface and the first end of the first side screen is greater than or equal to the first At the preset value, the electronic device determines that the first touch area is located between the first end of the first side screen and the first contact surface; the first preset condition is that the height of the contact surface is greater than the first height threshold, and the contact surface The ratio of the capacitance value of the most edge coordinate column to the capacitance value of the secondary edge coordinate column of the contact surface is within the first ratio range; or, the first preset condition is that the height of the contact surface is greater than the first height threshold, and the height of the contact surface The ratio to the width of the contact surface is greater than the first height ratio, and the ratio of the capacitance value
  • the above electronic device determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area on the first side screen, including: When the touch information of the surface meets the second preset condition, the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is a finger grip contact surface; when the distance between the first contact surface and the first end of the first side screen is greater than or equal to the second At the preset value, the electronic device determines that the first touch area is located between the first end of the first side screen and the first contact surface; the first contact surface is the finger grip closest to the first end of the first side screen Holding the contact surface; the second preset condition is that the height of the contact surface is within the first height range, and the ratio of the capacitance value of the most edge coordinate column of the contact surface to the capacitance value of the secondary edge coordinate column of the contact surface is in the second ratio range Or, the second preset condition is that the height of the contact surface is within the first height range, the ratio of the height of the contact surface to the width
  • the above electronic device determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area on the first side screen, including: When the touch information of the surface meets the third preset condition, the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is a finger grip contact surface; when the distance between the first contact surface and the first end of the first side screen is greater than or equal to the third At the preset value, the electronic device determines that the first touch area is located between the first end of the first side screen and the first contact surface; the third preset condition is that the height of the contact surface is within the second height range, and the contact surface The ratio of the capacitance value of the most edge coordinate column to the capacitance value of the secondary edge coordinate column of the contact surface is within the fourth ratio range; or, the third preset condition is that the height of the contact surface is greater than the second height range, and the height of the contact surface The ratio to the width of the contact surface is within the fifth ratio range, and the ratio of the capacitance value of the most
  • the above electronic device determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area on the first side screen, including: When the touch information of the surface meets the fourth preset condition, the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is a tiger’s mouth contact surface; when the distance between the first contact surface and the first end of the first side screen is greater than or equal to the fourth preset condition Value, the electronic device determines that the first touch area is located between the first end of the first side screen and the first contact surface; the fourth preset condition is that the height of the contact surface is within the third height range, and the height of the contact surface The ratio of the capacitance value of the most edge coordinate column to the capacitance value of the secondary edge coordinate column of the contact surface is within the sixth ratio range; or, the fourth preset condition is that the height of the contact surface is greater than the third height range, and the height of the contact surface is equal to The ratio of the width of the contact surface is within the seventh ratio range, and the ratio
  • the value in the ratio range is greater than or equal to 1, the value in the sixth ratio range is less than or equal to the value in the second ratio range, the value in the seventh ratio range is less than or equal to the first height ratio, and the value in the seventh ratio range is less than or equal to the first height ratio.
  • the value is greater than or equal to the value in the fifth ratio range, and the value in the third area range is less than or equal to the first area threshold.
  • the above electronic device determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area on the first side screen of the electronic device, including: When the touch information of the first contact surface and the touch information of the second contact surface both satisfy the third preset condition, the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is a finger grip contact surface; when the first contact surface and the second contact surface When the distance of the contact surface is greater than or equal to the fifth preset value, the electronic device determines that the first touch area is located between the first contact surface and the second contact surface.
  • the above electronic device determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area on the first side screen of the electronic device, including: When the touch information of the first contact surface and the touch information of the second contact surface both satisfy the fourth preset condition, the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is a tiger-mouth contact surface; when the first contact surface and the second contact surface When the distance of is greater than or equal to the sixth preset value, the electronic device determines that the first touch area is located between the first contact surface and the second contact surface.
  • the value in the sixth ratio range is greater than or equal to 1
  • the value in the third height range is greater than or equal to the value in the second height range
  • the value in the seventh ratio range is The value is greater than or equal to the value in the fifth ratio range
  • the value in the third area range is greater than or equal to the value in the second area range.
  • the third contact surface is located on the first side screen of the touch screen; the above-mentioned touch information based on the third contact surface, the electronic device determines that the first side screen on the touch screen is not
  • the touch area includes: when the touch information of the third contact surface meets the first preset condition, and the distance between the third contact surface and the first end of the first side screen is less than the first preset value, the electronic device determines The screen on the first side is a non-touch area.
  • the third contact surface is located on the first side screen of the touch screen; the above-mentioned touch information based on the third contact surface, the electronic device determines that the first side screen on the touch screen is not
  • the touch area includes: when the touch information of the third contact surface meets the second preset condition, and the distance between the third contact surface and the first end of the first side screen is less than the second preset value, the electronic device determines The screen on the first side is a non-touch area.
  • the third contact surface is located on the first side screen of the touch screen; the above-mentioned touch information based on the third contact surface, the electronic device determines that the first side screen on the touch screen is not
  • the touch area includes: when the touch information of the third contact surface meets the third preset condition, and the distance between the third contact surface and the first end of the first side screen is less than the third preset value, the electronic device determines The screen on the first side is a non-touch area.
  • the third contact surface is located on the first side screen of the touch screen; the above-mentioned touch information based on the third contact surface, the electronic device determines that the first side screen on the touch screen is not
  • the touch area includes: when the touch information of the third contact surface meets the fourth preset condition, and the distance between the third contact surface and the first end of the first side screen is less than the fourth preset value, the electronic device determines The screen on the first side is a non-touch area.
  • the electronic device determines that the first side screen is a non-touch area, including: when the third contact surface When the touch information of the fourth contact surface and the touch information of the fourth contact surface both satisfy the third preset condition, and the distance between the third contact surface and the fourth contact surface is less than the fifth preset value, the electronic device determines that the first side screen is Non-touch area.
  • the electronic device determines that the first side screen is a non-touch area, including: when the third contact surface When the touch information of the fourth contact surface and the touch information of the fourth contact surface both satisfy the fourth preset condition, and the distance between the third contact surface and the fourth contact surface is less than the sixth preset value, the electronic device determines that the first side screen is Non-touch area.
  • the electronic device determines that the first side screen is a non-touch area, including: when the third contact surface When the touch information of the fourth contact surface and the touch information of the fourth contact surface both meet the fourth preset condition, the electronic device determines that the third contact surface and the fourth contact surface are both contact surfaces, and the electronic device determines that the first side screen is Non-touch area.
  • the first contact surface is located on the back screen of the electronic device; the above-mentioned touch information based on the first contact surface, the electronic device determines the first touch area and the second touch area on the touch screen of the electronic device.
  • a non-touch area including: when the distance between the first side of the first contact surface and the top of the first side screen of the touch screen is greater than or equal to the seventh preset value, the electronic device determines the first side of the first side screen
  • a touch area is located between the top of the first side screen and the first side; the first side is adjacent to the first side screen, and the distance between the first contact surface and the first side is a first distance value.
  • the electronic device determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area on the touch screen of the electronic device based on the touch information of the first contact surface, including: The touch information of the contact surface, the electronic device determines the user's holding state, and based on the user's holding state, determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area on the first side screen; the user's holding The states include left-hand vertical holding, right-hand vertical holding, two-hand vertical holding, left-hand horizontal holding, right-hand horizontal holding, and two-hand horizontal holding.
  • the first end of the first side screen is the top of the first side screen; or, the first end of the first side screen is the top or first side of the first side screen Edge the bottom of the screen.
  • the present application provides an electronic device including a touch screen, a memory, one or more processors, and one or more programs; wherein, the one or more programs are stored in the memory It is characterized in that, when the one or more processors execute the one or more programs, the electronic device executes the touch area adjustment method in any one of the possible implementations of the third aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium in which a computer program is stored. When it runs on a computer, the computer can execute any one of the first and third aspects. The methods and steps described.
  • the touch area adjustment method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can determine the first area in the touch screen of the terminal device where the sensing parameters change, and determine the gesture of the electronic device being grasped according to the position of the first area, and then according to the gesture Adjust the position of the touch area in the touch screen of the terminal device, so that the adjusted touch area is far away from the first area, so as to prevent the touch area from being touched by mistake and improve the user experience.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • Fig. 2A is a front view of an electronic device using a ring screen disclosed in an embodiment of the application;
  • 2B is a side view of an electronic device using a ring screen disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 3 is a perspective view of an electronic device using a surround screen disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • 4A is a schematic diagram of an electronic device using a folding screen disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • 4B is a schematic diagram of another electronic device using a folding screen disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • 4C is a schematic diagram of another electronic device using a folding screen disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams of another electronic device using a ring screen disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • 6A and 6B are schematic diagrams of another electronic device using a surround screen disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIGS. 7A to 7C are schematic diagrams of another electronic device using a folding screen disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 8A is a schematic structural diagram of a screen disclosed in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 8B is a schematic structural diagram of a touch sensor disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a working flow of a touch area adjustment method disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram of the workflow of yet another method for adjusting a touch area disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram of a first area disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram of the workflow of another touch area adjustment method disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram of another first area disclosed in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram of another first area disclosed in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the workflow of another touch area adjustment method disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a first area of an electronic device disclosed in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the first one-hand grasping handshake gesture disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • 15 is a schematic diagram of the workflow of another touch area adjustment method disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • 16 is a schematic diagram of a first area of another electronic device disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a second one-hand grasping handshake gesture disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of the workflow of yet another method for adjusting a touch area disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of a first area of another electronic device disclosed in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of a horizontal screen grasping a handshake gesture disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of the workflow of another touch area adjustment method disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of a first area of another electronic device disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of a third one-handed grasping handshake gesture disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram of the workflow of another touch area adjustment method disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram of a first area of another electronic device disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram of a first area of another electronic device disclosed in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram of a fourth one-handed grasping handshake gesture disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram of a fifth one-handed grasping handshake gesture disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram of display content of a side screen disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIGS. 30A to 30D are schematic diagrams of information interaction of side screens disclosed in the embodiments of this application.
  • 31A to 31C are schematic diagrams of the left hand longitudinal grip disclosed in the embodiments of the application.
  • 32A to 32C are schematic diagrams of the right hand longitudinal grip disclosed in the embodiments of the application.
  • 33A to 33B are schematic diagrams of longitudinal holding with both hands disclosed in the embodiments of the application.
  • 34A to 34D are schematic diagrams of the left-hand horizontal grip disclosed in the embodiments of the application.
  • 35A to 35D are schematic diagrams of lateral holding by the right hand disclosed in the embodiments of the application.
  • 36A to 36D are schematic diagrams of lateral holding with both hands disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • 37A to 37D are schematic diagrams of touch areas and non-touch areas disclosed in the embodiments of this application.
  • 38A to 38C are schematic diagrams of the touch area and the non-touch area disclosed in the embodiments of the application.
  • 39A to 39G are schematic diagrams of touch areas and non-touch areas disclosed in the embodiments of this application.
  • 40A to 40D are schematic diagrams of touch areas and non-touch areas disclosed in the embodiments of this application.
  • 41A to 41F are schematic diagrams of touch areas and non-touch areas disclosed in the embodiments of this application.
  • FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram of display content of a side screen disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 43 is a schematic diagram of a workflow of another touch area adjustment method disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram of a capacitance signal of a contact surface disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram of a hardware system disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram of a software system disclosed in an embodiment of the application.
  • words such as “exemplary” or “for example” are used as examples, illustrations, or illustrations. Any embodiment or design solution described as “exemplary” or “for example” in the embodiments of the present application should not be construed as being more preferable or advantageous than other embodiments or design solutions. To be precise, words such as “exemplary” or “for example” are used to present related concepts in a specific manner.
  • embodiments of the present application disclose a touch area adjustment method and device.
  • the touch area adjustment method disclosed in each embodiment of the present application can be applied to various types of electronic devices.
  • the electronic device may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a handheld computer, a netbook, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a wearable electronic device, a smart watch, etc.
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • the electronic device may also be of other types.
  • the embodiment of the application does not limit this.
  • the structure of the electronic device may be as shown in FIG. 1, where FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the electronic device applying the touch area adjustment method disclosed in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, and a battery 142, Sensor module 180, buttons 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194 and so on.
  • the sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, and ambient light Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
  • the electronic device when the electronic device is a mobile phone, the electronic device may also include: antenna 1, antenna 2, mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, headset Interface 170D, subscriber identification module (SIM) card interface 195, etc.
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • the structure illustrated in this embodiment does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device.
  • the electronic device may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or split certain components, or arrange different components.
  • the illustrated components can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units.
  • the processor 110 may include an application processor (AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU), etc.
  • AP application processor
  • modem processor modem processor
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • image signal processor image signal processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • controller video codec
  • digital signal processor digital signal processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • NPU neural-network processing unit
  • the different processing units may be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
  • the controller can be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device.
  • the controller can generate operation control signals according to the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching instructions and executing instructions.
  • a memory may also be provided in the processor 110 to store instructions and data.
  • the memory in the processor 110 is a cache memory.
  • the memory can store instructions or data that have just been used or recycled by the processor 110. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be directly called from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided, the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, and the efficiency of the system is improved.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
  • the interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous transceiver receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and / Or Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface, etc.
  • I2C integrated circuit
  • I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • UART universal asynchronous transceiver receiver/transmitter
  • MIPI mobile industry processor interface
  • GPIO general-purpose input/output
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • USB Universal Serial Bus
  • the I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, which includes a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL).
  • the processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses.
  • the processor 110 may be coupled to the touch sensor 180K, charger, flash, camera 193, etc., respectively through different I2C bus interfaces.
  • the processor 110 may couple the touch sensor 180K through an I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through the I2C bus interface to realize the touch function of the electronic device.
  • the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses.
  • the processor 110 may be coupled with the audio module 170 through an I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170.
  • the audio module 170 may transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through an I2S interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the PCM interface can also be used for audio communication to sample, quantize and encode analog signals.
  • the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface.
  • the audio module 170 may also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through the Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication.
  • the bus can be a two-way communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
  • the UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160.
  • the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to realize the Bluetooth function.
  • the audio module 170 may transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through a UART interface, so as to realize the function of playing music through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the display screen 194, the camera 193 and other peripheral devices.
  • the MIPI interface includes a camera serial interface (camera serial interface, CSI), a display serial interface (display serial interface, DSI), and so on.
  • the processor 110 and the camera 193 communicate through a CSI interface to implement the shooting function of the electronic device.
  • the processor 110 and the display screen 194 communicate through the DSI interface to realize the display function of the electronic device.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured through software.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal.
  • the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, the display screen 194, the wireless communication module 160, the audio module 170, the sensor module 180, and so on.
  • the GPIO interface can also be configured as an I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 130 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and specifically may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and so on.
  • the USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device, and can also be used to transfer data between the electronic device and the peripheral device. It can also be used to connect earphones and play audio through earphones. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
  • the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in this embodiment is merely a schematic description, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device may also adopt different interface connection modes in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection modes.
  • the charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger.
  • the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 140 may receive the charging input of the wired charger through the USB interface 130.
  • the charging management module 140 may receive the wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device. While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142, it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 141.
  • the power management module 141 is used to connect the battery 142, the charging management module 140 and the processor 110.
  • the power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charge management module 140, and supplies power to the processor 110, the internal memory 121, the display screen 194, the camera 193, and the wireless communication module 160.
  • the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance).
  • the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110.
  • the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device can be realized by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor, and the baseband processor.
  • the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in an electronic device can be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization.
  • Antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network.
  • the antenna can be used in combination with a tuning switch.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can provide a wireless communication solution including 2G/3G/4G/5G and the like applied to electronic devices.
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, a switch, a power amplifier, a low noise amplifier (LNA), and the like.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves by the antenna 1, and perform processing such as filtering, amplifying and transmitting the received electromagnetic waves to the modem processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation via the antenna 1.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the processor 110.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be provided in the same device.
  • the modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
  • the modulator is used to modulate the low frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium and high frequency signal.
  • the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal.
  • the demodulator then transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
  • the application processor outputs a sound signal through an audio device (not limited to the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, etc.), or displays an image or video through the display screen 194.
  • the modem processor may be an independent device.
  • the modem processor may be independent of the processor 110 and be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on electronic devices including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) networks), bluetooth (BT), and global navigation satellite systems. (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (FM), near field communication (NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions.
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • BT Bluetooth
  • GNSS global navigation satellite system
  • FM frequency modulation
  • NFC near field communication
  • IR infrared technology
  • the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2, frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110.
  • the wireless communication module 160 may also receive a signal to be sent from the processor 110, perform frequency modulation, amplify, and convert it into electromagnetic waves to radiate through the antenna 2.
  • the antenna 1 of the electronic device is coupled with the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled with the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time-division code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc.
  • the GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system, QZSS) and/or satellite-based augmentation systems (SBAS).
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GLONASS global navigation satellite system
  • BDS Beidou navigation satellite system
  • QZSS quasi-zenith satellite system
  • SBAS satellite-based augmentation systems
  • the electronic device realizes the display function through the GPU, the display screen 194, and the application processor.
  • the GPU is an image processing microprocessor, which is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor.
  • the GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations and is used for graphics rendering.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
  • the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, and the like.
  • the display screen 194 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can adopt liquid crystal display (LCD), organic light-emitting diode (OLED), active matrix organic light-emitting diode or active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light-emitting diode).
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • OLED organic light-emitting diode
  • active-matrix organic light-emitting diode active-matrix organic light-emitting diode
  • AMOLED flexible light-emitting diode (FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oled, quantum dot light-emitting diode (QLED), etc.
  • the electronic device may include one or N display screens 194, and N is a positive integer greater than one.
  • GUIs graphical user interfaces
  • the size of the display screen 194 of an electronic device is fixed, and only limited controls can be displayed on the display screen 194 of the electronic device.
  • Control is a kind of GUI element, it is a kind of software component, contained in the application, and controls all the data processed by the application and the interactive operations on these data. The user can interact with the control through direct manipulation. , So as to read or edit the relevant information of the application.
  • controls may include visual interface elements such as icons, buttons, menus, tabs, text boxes, dialog boxes, status bars, navigation bars, and Widgets.
  • the display screen 194 may display virtual keys.
  • Electronic equipment can achieve shooting functions through ISP, camera 193, video codec, GPU, display 194, and application processor.
  • the ISP is used to process the data fed back from the camera 193. For example, when taking a picture, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the photosensitive element of the camera through the lens, the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the photosensitive element of the camera transmits the electrical signal to the ISP for processing and is converted into an image visible to the naked eye.
  • ISP can also optimize the image noise, brightness, and skin color. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene.
  • the ISP may be provided in the camera 193.
  • the camera 193 is used to capture still images or videos.
  • the object generates an optical image through the lens and is projected to the photosensitive element.
  • the photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
  • the photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then transfers the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
  • ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing.
  • DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other formats of image signals.
  • the electronic device may include 1 or N cameras 193, and N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device selects the frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy of the frequency point.
  • Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
  • the electronic device can support one or more video codecs.
  • the electronic device can play or record videos in multiple encoding formats, such as: moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, and so on.
  • MPEG moving picture experts group
  • NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor.
  • NN neural-network
  • applications such as intelligent cognition of electronic devices can be realized, such as: image recognition, face recognition, voice recognition, text understanding, etc.
  • the external memory interface 120 may be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device.
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to realize the data storage function. For example, save music, video and other files in an external memory card.
  • the internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, where the executable program code includes instructions.
  • the processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device by running instructions stored in the internal memory 121.
  • the processor 110 may implement the adjustment of the manipulation area through the solution disclosed in the embodiment of the present application by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 121.
  • the internal memory 121 may include a storage program area and a storage data area.
  • the storage program area can store an operating system, an application program (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) required by at least one function, and the like.
  • the data storage area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device.
  • the internal memory 121 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, a flash memory device, a universal flash storage (UFS), and the like.
  • the processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device by running instructions stored in the internal memory 121 and/or instructions stored in a memory provided in the processor.
  • the electronic device can implement audio functions through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the earphone interface 170D, and the application processor. For example, music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into an analog audio signal for output, and is also used to convert an analog audio input into a digital audio signal.
  • the audio module 170 can also be used to encode and decode audio signals.
  • the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110, or part of the functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110.
  • the speaker 170A also called “speaker” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to a hands-free call.
  • the receiver 170B also called “earpiece” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device answers a call or voice message, it can receive the voice by bringing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
  • the microphone 170C also called “microphone”, “microphone”, is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals.
  • the user can make a sound by approaching the microphone 170C through the human mouth, and input the sound signal into the microphone 170C.
  • the electronic device may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other embodiments, the electronic device may be provided with two microphones 170C, which can realize noise reduction function in addition to collecting sound signals. In other embodiments, the electronic device may also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and realize directional recording functions.
  • the earphone interface 170D is used to connect wired earphones.
  • the earphone interface 170D may be a USB interface 130, or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, or a cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
  • OMTP open mobile terminal platform
  • CTIA cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA
  • the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and can convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal.
  • the pressure sensor 180A may be provided on the display screen 194.
  • the capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates with conductive materials. When a force is applied to the pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes. The electronic device determines the strength of the pressure based on the change in capacitance. When a touch operation acts on the display screen 194, the electronic device detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A. The electronic device may also calculate the touched position based on the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A.
  • touch operations that act on the same touch position but have different touch operation strengths may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation whose intensity of the touch operation is less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used to determine the movement posture of the electronic device.
  • the angular velocity of the electronic device around three axes ie, x, y, and z axes
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization.
  • the gyroscope sensor 180B detects the angle of the shake of the electronic device, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate according to the angle, and allows the lens to counteract the shake of the electronic device through a reverse movement to achieve anti-shake.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
  • the air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure.
  • the electronic device calculates the altitude based on the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
  • the magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the electronic device can use the magnetic sensor 180D to detect the opening and closing of the flip holster.
  • the electronic device when the electronic device is a flip machine, the electronic device can detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D.
  • features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
  • the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the magnitude of the acceleration of the electronic device in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and apply to applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers, etc.
  • Distance sensor 180F used to measure distance.
  • Electronic equipment can measure distance through infrared or laser.
  • the electronic device may use the distance sensor 180F to measure the distance to achieve fast focusing.
  • the proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector such as a photodiode.
  • the light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode.
  • the electronic device emits infrared light to the outside through the light-emitting diode.
  • Electronic devices use photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device. When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device can determine that there is no object near the electronic device.
  • the electronic device can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect that the user holds the electronic device close to the ear to talk, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power.
  • the proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in leather case mode, and the pocket mode will automatically unlock and lock the screen.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense the brightness of the ambient light.
  • the electronic device can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived brightness of the ambient light.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device is in the pocket to prevent accidental touch.
  • the fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints. Electronic devices can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to unlock fingerprints, access application locks, take photos with fingerprints, and answer calls with fingerprints.
  • the temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature.
  • the electronic device uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute the temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold value, the electronic device executes to reduce the performance of the processor located near the temperature sensor 180J, so as to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection.
  • the electronic device when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device heats the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown of the electronic device due to low temperature.
  • the electronic device boosts the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
  • Touch sensor 180K also called “touch device”.
  • the touch sensor 180K may be disposed on the display screen 194, and the touch screen is composed of the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194, which is also called a “touch screen”.
  • the touch sensor 180K is used to detect touch operations acting on or near it.
  • the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event.
  • the visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194.
  • the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device, which is different from the position of the display screen 194.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the human voice vibrating bone mass.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human pulse and receive the blood pressure pulse signal.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M may also be provided in the earphone, combined with the bone conduction earphone.
  • the audio module 170 can parse the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vibrating bone block of the voice obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, and realize the voice function.
  • the application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, and realize the heart rate detection function.
  • the button 190 includes a power button, a volume button, and so on.
  • the button 190 may be a mechanical button. It can also be a touch button.
  • the electronic device can receive key input, and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device.
  • the motor 191 can generate vibration prompts.
  • the motor 191 can be used for incoming call vibration notification, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
  • touch operations applied to different applications can correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • Acting on touch operations in different areas of the display screen 194, the motor 191 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • Different application scenarios for example: time reminding, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.
  • the touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
  • the indicator 192 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate the charging status, power change, or to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and so on.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is used to connect to the SIM card.
  • the SIM card can be inserted into the SIM card interface 195 or pulled out from the SIM card interface 195 to achieve contact and separation with the electronic device.
  • the electronic device can support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, and N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM cards, Micro SIM cards, SIM cards, etc.
  • the same SIM card interface 195 can insert multiple cards at the same time. The types of the multiple cards can be the same or different.
  • the SIM card interface 195 can also be compatible with different types of SIM cards.
  • the SIM card interface 195 may also be compatible with external memory cards.
  • the electronic device interacts with the network through the SIM card to realize functions such as call and data communication.
  • the electronic device adopts an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card.
  • the eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device and cannot be separated from the electronic device.
  • an operating system runs.
  • the iOS operating system developed by Apple the Android operating system developed by Google
  • the Windows operating system developed by Microsoft You can install and run applications on this operating system.
  • the electronic device involved in the embodiment of the present application may be installed with an iOS operating system, an Android operating system, or a Windows operating system, or the electronic device may also be installed with other operating systems, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • top, bottom, left, and right ends, as well as the top and bottom mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are all relative, and are exemplary descriptions in specific implementation manners, and should not be limited to the embodiments of the present application.
  • the display screen 194 usually includes a touch area.
  • the electronic device can execute the The operation corresponding to the icon.
  • some electronic equipment currently supports 100% full screen, that is, in addition to the display screen of the electronic equipment, it also supports the extension of some specific functions for other areas.
  • a touch area is provided in the other area.
  • the electronic device When the electronic device is required to perform the specific function, the user touches the touch area located in the other area, so that the electronic device performs a corresponding operation. Therefore, under the condition that the volume of the electronic device does not change, by touching the touch area in the other area, the electronic device can realize the specific function, thereby improving the utilization rate of other areas of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device applying the method disclosed in the embodiment of the present application can also apply multiple types of screens.
  • other areas with specific functions can also be of multiple types.
  • the display screen of the electronic device may be referred to as the first screen, and the other area extended with specific functions is the second screen, and the second screen is provided with a touch area.
  • the electronic device may perform the specific function.
  • the specific function extended by the second screen is brightness adjustment
  • the user can touch the touch area of the second screen. After receiving the user's touch, the electronic device performs a corresponding brightness adjustment operation.
  • the first screen of the electronic device is the front screen area of the electronic device
  • the second screen may be the side area of the electronic device
  • the side area usually refers to the area of the electronic device.
  • the side areas on the left and right sides
  • the second screen is the side area on the left and right sides of the electronic device.
  • the above-mentioned ring screen can also be referred to as a curved screen.
  • the first screen of the electronic device is the front screen area of the electronic device
  • the second screen may be the side area and the back area of the electronic device.
  • the side area usually refers to the left and right sides of the electronic device.
  • the side areas on both sides For example, referring to the three-dimensional view shown in FIG. 3, when the electronic device uses a surround screen, the second screen is the side area and the back area of the electronic device.
  • the screen of the application of the electronic device is a folding screen, which can be folded along the folding line, thereby dividing the entire folding screen into two display screens, namely the first display screen and the second display screen.
  • the first display screen and the second display screen can present multiple states, such as an unfolded state and a folded state.
  • FIGS. 4A, 4B, and 4C where, in FIG. 4A, the first display screen 41 and the second display screen 42 are not folded, and the first display screen 41 and the second display screen 42 are not folded. Spliced into an independent display screen.
  • the first display screen 41 and the second display screen 42 are in an expanded state, that is, when the state of the first display screen 41 and the second display screen 42 is as shown in FIG. 4A, usually
  • the display screen formed by splicing the first display screen 41 and the second display screen 42 is used as the first screen of the electronic device, and the side area of the spliced display screen is used as the second screen.
  • the fold line 43 is located between the first display screen 41 and the second display screen 42.
  • the two display screens in FIG. 4B and FIG. 4C are in a folded state.
  • the angle between the two display screens is relatively small.
  • one of the display screens is usually used as the display screen.
  • the other display is the back of the electronic device.
  • the first display screen 41 may be used as the display screen of the electronic device
  • the second display screen 42 may be the back of the electronic device.
  • the display screen 41 and the second display screen 42 are in a folded state, and the angle between the first display screen 41 and the second display screen 42 is small, that is, the first display screen 41 and the second display screen 42
  • the display screen 42 is shown in FIG. 4B, the display screen of the electronic device is usually used as the first screen, and the back and side areas of the electronic device are used as the second screen.
  • the included angle between the first display screen 41 and the second display screen 42 is less than the angle threshold, the included angle between the first display screen 41 and the second display screen 42 is relatively small.
  • the angle threshold can be preset, and during the use of the electronic device, the angle threshold can also be adjusted. Exemplarily, the angle threshold may be 10 degrees. Of course, the angle threshold may also be other angle values, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the angle between the two display screens is relatively large.
  • both display screens can be used as display screens, and the first display screen 41 and the second display screen 42 can respectively display different pictures. .
  • both display screens can be used as the first screen, and the side area can be used as the second screen.
  • the included angle between the first display screen 41 and the second display screen 42 is not less than the angle threshold, the included angle between the first display screen 41 and the second display screen 42 is relatively large.
  • the electronic device to which the method disclosed in the embodiment of this application is applied includes a first screen and a second screen.
  • the first screen is the display screen of the electronic device
  • the second screen is the first screen of the electronic device.
  • the second screen includes a touch area. After receiving the touch for the touch area in the second screen, the electronic device performs an operation corresponding to the touch.
  • the second screen includes at least a side area of the electronic device.
  • the second screen also includes the back area of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device uses a folding screen, and between the first display screen and the second display screen in the folding screen When the included angle of is smaller, the second screen also includes the back area of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device may also use other forms of screens.
  • the first screen and the second screen of the electronic device may also be in other forms, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the second screen in the electronic device in this application includes a touch area. Therefore, when the user is holding the electronic device, he may accidentally touch the touch area of the second screen, resulting in situations that the user does not need. Next, the electronic device will still perform the function corresponding to the touch area, that is, the electronic device will perform operations that the user does not need.
  • the embodiments of the present application disclose a touch area adjustment method and device.
  • FIG. 5A is a three-dimensional schematic diagram of another electronic device equipped with a ring screen provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 5A shows a front view of the electronic device.
  • the display screen of the electronic device includes a front screen 21, a side screen 22, and a side screen 23.
  • the front screen 21 is connected to the side screen 22 and the side screen 23.
  • the side screen 22 and the side screen 23 are curved side screens located on the side of the electronic device, and the side screen 22 and the side screen 23 occupy their positions. Part or all of the area on the side of the electronic device.
  • the side of the electronic device may also include a side frame.
  • the rear shell of the electronic device is arranged on the back of the electronic device.
  • FIG. 6A is a three-dimensional schematic diagram of another electronic device with a surround screen provided in an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 6B shows a front view of the electronic device.
  • the screen of the electronic device includes a screen 31, a screen 32, a side screen 33, and a side screen 34.
  • the screen 31 is located on one of the front and back of the electronic device
  • the screen 32 is located on the other side of the front and back of the electronic device
  • the side screen 33 and the side screen 34 are curved side screens on the side of the electronic device.
  • the surround screen does not have the side bezels of traditional terminal equipment.
  • the screen of the electronic device may include a screen 51, a screen 52, and a screen 53.
  • the screen 53 is connected to the screen 51 and the screen 52, and the screen 53 is the foldable area of the electronic device.
  • the screen 53 can form a side screen of the electronic device.
  • FIG. 7A the screen 53 has not been bent, the screen of the electronic device is in an unfolded form, and the angle formed by the screen 51 and the screen 52 is equal to 180 degrees.
  • FIG. 7A the screen 53 has not been bent, the screen of the electronic device is in an unfolded form, and the angle formed by the screen 51 and the screen 52 is equal to 180 degrees.
  • the screen 53 is bent, the screen of the electronic device is in a half-folded form, and the angle 1 formed by the screen 51 and the screen 52 is greater than 0 degree and less than 180 degrees.
  • the screen 53 is bent, the display screen 194 of the electronic device is in a fully folded configuration, and the angle formed by the screen 51 and the screen 52 is equal to 0 degrees.
  • the left and right sides of the electronic device shown in FIGS. 5A and 6A are both equipped with side screens, and the electronic device with a folding screen has only one side screen in the folded configuration.
  • the screen 53 when the angle 1 between the screen 51 and the screen 52 is greater than the angle threshold 1, the screen 53 forms a side screen of the electronic device.
  • the angle threshold of 1 is equal to 10 degrees.
  • the side screens of the display screen 194 shown in FIGS. 5A to 7C are curved or even foldable screens.
  • the screen of the electronic device in the embodiment of the present application may be a flexible screen made of a flexible material.
  • the flexible screen made of a flexible material uses non-rigid glass as a substrate, and the curved screen has better elasticity and is not easily broken.
  • the screen shown in FIGS. 5A to 7C may be an integrated flexible screen, or may be composed of a rigid screen and a flexible screen spliced together.
  • the side screen may also be referred to as a side area.
  • FIG. 8A shows a screen 40 of an electronic device related to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the screen 40 of the terminal may include a protective glass, a touch sensor 50, a display screen, and a bottom plate.
  • the screen 40 may be a curved screen, a surround screen, or a folding screen as shown in FIGS. 2A to 7C.
  • the touch sensor 50 and the display screen may form a touch screen, where the touch sensor 50 may be the touch sensor 180K in the foregoing embodiment, and the display screen may be the display screen 194 in the foregoing embodiment.
  • FIG. 1 The embodiment of the device is shown and will not be repeated here.
  • the touch sensor 50 may include an X-axis electrode layer and a Y-axis electrode layer.
  • the X-axis electrode layer and the Y-axis electrode layer are distributed across the touch sensor 50 to form an M*N array distribution as shown in FIG. 8B.
  • the electronic device will detect the change of the capacitance value of each coordinate point by scanning the X and Y axes at a specific detection frequency, and can determine the user's touch information according to the change of the capacitance value of each coordinate point.
  • the touch information can include The touch position and touch area of the user's contact surface on the display screen 194.
  • the user's hand when the user's hand touches the touch screen, the user's hand absorbs a part of the excitation signal from the Tx electrode from the Tx electrode, and thus, the excitation signal received on the Rx electrode is weakened.
  • the terminal scans and detects the magnitude of the mutual capacitance of each coordinate point on the touch sensor 50, the user's touch position can be calculated according to the capacitance change of each coordinate point.
  • the capacitance of the hand will be superimposed on the screen capacitance of the touch screen (the self-capacitance formed by the Tx electrode and the ground, or the self-capacitance formed by the Rx electrode and the ground.
  • Self-capacitance to change the capacitance of the screen body.
  • the terminal scans and detects the size of the self-capacitance of each electrode on each coordinate point on the touch sensor 50, the touch position of the user's hand can be determined according to the capacitance change of each electrode of each coordinate point.
  • the electronic device may have the following three detection states for the user's touch operation on the touch screen: an active state, an idle state, and a sleep state.
  • the terminal uses the first frequency to detect touch operations on the touch screen.
  • the first frequency is 120 Hz.
  • the terminal uses the second frequency to detect touch operations on the touch screen.
  • the second frequency is 1 Hz or 10 Hz.
  • Sleep state In the Sleep state, the terminal does not detect touch operations on the touch screen.
  • the electronic device can determine that the coordinate points from the Xth column to the X+nth column in the M*N touch screen array correspond to the side edges based on the position distribution of the side screen on the display 194 screen. For example, for the curved screens shown in FIGS. 5A to 5B, the electronic device determines that the first to nth column coordinate points in the M*N touch screen array correspond to the side screen 21, and the N-n+1th column to The Nth column of coordinate points corresponds to the side screen 22. For example, for the folding screens shown in FIGS. 7A to 7C, the electronic device determines that the centered n columns of coordinate points in the M*N touch screen array correspond to the side screen 53.
  • Traditional electronic devices including side bezels provide users with shortcut functions through physical buttons set on the side bezels.
  • the above-mentioned functions are usually frequently used or more general functions, such as switching on and off, volume increase and decrease, or screen capture.
  • the side screens shown in Figures 5A to 7C replace part or all of the traditional side bezels.
  • the side screens can be touch areas for information interaction with users, and continue to provide users with the above shortcut functions and other more functions. (For example, taking photos, answering phone calls, smart assistants and quick payment, etc.).
  • the side screen of the electronic device may receive a user's sliding operation, and in response to the detected sliding operation, the electronic device may adjust the display brightness of the display screen.
  • the side screen also increases the interaction mode between the electronic device and the user, and improves the user experience.
  • the side of the electronic device is the position where the user's hand can hold it. Therefore, as a touch area for information interaction, in the holding state, the risk of misoperation of the side screen will greatly increase.
  • the touch area adjustment method provided by the embodiment of the present application can adjust the touch area that the user can operate on the side screen according to the user's holding state.
  • the proposed method fits the user's usage habits, effectively reduces the risk of misoperation during the user's interaction with the side screen, and improves the user's experience of using the side screen.
  • the touch area adjustment method provided in the embodiments of the present application is also applicable to other types of display screens with side screens, which are not specifically limited here.
  • a method for adjusting a touch area is disclosed.
  • the method is applied to an electronic device, the electronic device includes a first screen and a second screen, the first screen is a display screen of the electronic device, and the second screen is a different display from the electronic device.
  • the second screen includes a touch area.
  • the second screen includes at least a side area of the electronic device.
  • the touch area adjustment method disclosed in the embodiment of the present application includes the following steps:
  • Step S11 Determine the first area on the second screen where the sensing parameter changes.
  • the touched area on the second screen is determined by the change of the sensing parameter in the second screen.
  • the induction parameter can be in various forms.
  • the second screen of the electronic device may include a side area of the electronic device.
  • the second screen of the electronic device may include a side area and a back area of the electronic device.
  • the second screen when the electronic device is in a folded state, the second screen may include a side area and a back area of the electronic device.
  • a pressure sensor is provided in the second screen, and when a certain area of the second screen is touched, the pressure sensor can sense the pressure change of the touched area, and determine that the pressure change area is The first area.
  • the sensing parameter is pressure.
  • a temperature sensor is provided in the second screen.
  • the temperature sensor can sense the temperature change of the touched area and determine the temperature change.
  • the area is the first area.
  • the sensing parameter is temperature.
  • a capacitance sensor is provided in the second screen, and when a certain area of the second screen is touched, the capacitance sensor can sense that the capacitance of the touched area changes, and determine that the area where the capacitance has changed is The first area.
  • the sensing parameter is capacitance.
  • the sensing parameters may also be parameters of other forms, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • different types of sensors can be set in the second screen at the same time, and correspondingly, the sensing parameters can be a combination of multiple types of parameters.
  • a pressure sensor and a temperature sensor are set in the second screen at the same time.
  • the sensing parameter includes both a pressure sensor and a temperature sensor.
  • Step S12 Determine a gesture of grasping the electronic device according to the position of the first area on the second screen.
  • the electronic device may determine one or more first areas where the sensing parameters are changed on the second screen.
  • the electronic device may determine the gesture of grasping the electronic device according to the position of the one or more first regions on the second screen.
  • gestures for grasping an electronic device including one hand grasping the lower part of the electronic device, one hand grasping the middle part of the electronic device, and both hands grasping the four sides of the electronic device Angle and so on.
  • step S12 according to the position of the first area on the second screen, the contact positions of the thenar, the fingers and/or the palm with the side area can be determined respectively, and then the electronic device itself can be determined.
  • the gesture of being grasped according to the position of the first area on the second screen, the contact positions of the thenar, the fingers and/or the palm with the side area can be determined respectively, and then the electronic device itself can be determined. The gesture of being grasped.
  • Step S13 Adjust the position of the touch area on the second screen according to the gesture of the electronic device being grasped, so that the adjusted touch area is away from the first area.
  • the touch area of the second screen It can be determined whether the touch area of the second screen will be touched by the gesture of the electronic device being grasped and the position of the current touch area on the second screen.
  • the touch area of the second screen is easier to be touched, adjust the position of the touch area on the second screen, because the adjusted touch area is far from the first area, and the first area It is usually the area where the user grips the electronic device.
  • the adjusted touch area is far away from the first area, it indicates that the adjusted touch area is far away from the area where the electronic device is grasped, and the touch area may be touched by mistake Sexual decrease.
  • the touch area can be adjusted to the side area of the side area.
  • the upper part so that the adjusted touch area is far away from the first area, so as to prevent the touch area from being touched by mistake.
  • the touch area adjustment method disclosed in the embodiment of the application can determine the first area in the second screen where the sensing parameter changes, and determine that the electronic device is caught according to the position of the first area on the second screen. According to the gesture of holding, the position of the touch area on the second screen is adjusted according to the gesture. Wherein, the touch area in the second screen is the extended touch area.
  • the solution disclosed in the embodiments of the present application adjusts the position of the touch area on the second screen based on the gesture of the electronic device being grasped, so that the adjusted touch area is far away from the first area, thereby avoiding the second The touch area of the screen is accidentally touched, which improves the user experience.
  • the electronic device is provided with a function corresponding to the touch area of the second screen, and when the touch area is touched, the electronic device will realize the function. After adjusting the position of the touch area of the second screen through the solution of the embodiment of the present application, when the adjusted touch area is touched, the electronic device will perform the function of the touch area. In other words, even if the position of the touch area of the second screen is adjusted, the electronic device can still achieve corresponding functions.
  • the touch area in the side area is used to adjust the volume of the electronic device, and the touch area is located at the first position in the side area, the touch area is adjusted to the second position in the side area. After the position, if the side area is touched, the electronic device will determine whether the touched area is the second position. When the electronic device determines that the touched area is the second position, the electronic device then performs a corresponding volume adjustment operation.
  • step S12 a gesture operation of determining that the electronic device is grasped according to the position of the first area on the second screen is disclosed.
  • the first area is an area where the sensing parameter changes in the second screen of the electronic device.
  • some areas of the second screen will also experience changes in sensing parameters. Therefore, in order to improve the accuracy of the gesture for determining that the electronic device is grasped, this application discloses other embodiments.
  • this embodiment referring to the schematic workflow diagram shown in FIG. 10A, before determining the gesture of grasping the electronic device according to the position of the first area on the second screen, the following steps are further included:
  • Step S14 When the first area includes more than two, calculate the amount of change in the sensing parameter of the first area.
  • Step S15 Determine a first target area in the first area, where the first target area is the first area where the change of the sensing parameter is greater than a first threshold.
  • the gesture of determining that the electronic device is grasped according to the position of the first area on the second screen in step S12 includes:
  • a gesture of grasping the electronic device is determined.
  • the amount of change in the sensing parameter of each first area is further calculated, and the first target area is determined based on the comparison of the amount of change with the first threshold, and According to the position of the first target area on the second screen, a gesture of grasping the electronic device is determined.
  • the electronic device is sometimes interfered, causing the sensing parameters in the second screen to change.
  • the second screen sometimes touches foreign objects (for example, leaves, raindrops, etc.), and the sensing parameters of the position where it touches the foreign objects will change.
  • the sensing parameter of a certain position in the second screen changes due to the interference of foreign objects, the change of the sensing parameter of the position is usually small.
  • the electronic device determines five first areas located on the second screen, including a first area 61, a first area 62, a first area 63, a first area 64 and a first area 65.
  • the electronic device calculates the change amount of the sensing parameter of each first area shown in FIG. 10B, where the change amount of the sensing parameter of the first area 61, the first area 62, the first area 63, and the first area 64 is greater than that of the first area 61, 62, 63, and 64.
  • a threshold value, the change amount of the sensing parameter of the first region 65 is less than or equal to the first threshold value.
  • the electronic device determines that the first area where the change of the sensing parameter is greater than the first threshold is the first target area.
  • the first target area includes a first area 61, a first area 62, a first area 63, and a first area. Area 64.
  • the electronic device may determine the gesture of grasping the electronic device according to the first target area.
  • the first target area includes the contact area between the thenar and the left side area in the second screen (ie, the first An area 61), and the contact area between the user’s finger and the right side area in the second screen (ie, the first area 62, the first area 63, and the first area 64). Therefore, the electronic device determines that the user holds the left hand with one hand Holding electronic equipment.
  • the first target area can be determined based on the change of the sensing parameter of each first area, and then the accuracy of the gesture of the electronic device being grasped can be determined according to the first target area.
  • the influence of external interference can be reduced, and the accuracy of the gesture for determining that the electronic device is grasped can be further improved.
  • Step S16 When the first area includes more than two, the area of the first area is acquired.
  • Step S17 Determine a second target area in the first area, where the second target area is a first area with an area greater than a second threshold.
  • the gesture of determining that the electronic device is grasped according to the position of the first area on the second screen in step S12 includes:
  • a gesture of grasping the electronic device is determined.
  • the electronic device is sometimes interfered, causing the sensing parameters in the second screen to change.
  • the area of the first area caused by interference is often small.
  • the second threshold may be determined according to the range of the size of the human palm. For example, the size of the palms of multiple users can be obtained through big data collection, and the area occupied by each finger in the palm can be counted accordingly, and then the second threshold value can be determined to be slightly smaller than the area occupied by each finger The minimum value in. In this case, when the user touches the second screen of the electronic device, the area of the first area caused by the touch operation is greater than the second threshold.
  • the second threshold can also be set in other ways, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • step S16 to step S17 it is possible to determine the second target area in the first area whose area is greater than the second threshold in the first area based on the area of each first area, and then determine the gesture of grasping the electronic device according to the second target area, thereby The influence of external interference can be reduced, and the accuracy of the gesture for determining that the electronic device is grasped can be further improved.
  • the electronic device determines five first areas on the second screen, including the first area 71, the first area 72, the first area 73, the first area 74, and the first area 75.
  • the electronic device determines the area of each first area shown in FIG. 11B, where the areas of the first area 71, the first area 72, the first area 73, and the first area 64 are all greater than the second threshold, and the area of the first area 75 The area is less than or equal to the second threshold.
  • the electronic device determines that the first area whose area is greater than the second threshold is the first target area.
  • the first target area includes a first area 71, a first area 72, a first area 73, and a first area 74.
  • the electronic device may determine the gesture of the electronic device being grasped according to the first target area, similar to FIG. 10B, according to the first target area shown in FIG. 11B, the electronic device may determine that the gesture of the electronic device being grasped is Hold with one hand in the left hand.
  • step S13 to step S14, and the operations of step S16 to step S17 respectively disclose solutions for determining the first target area according to the change of the sensing parameter and determining the second target area according to the area of the first area.
  • the corresponding target area may also be determined according to the change of the sensing parameter and the area of the first area at the same time.
  • the determining the gesture of grasping the electronic device according to the position of the first area on the second screen includes: according to the first target area and the second target The overlapping area in the area determines the gesture of the electronic device being grasped.
  • the electronic device determines that six first areas are located on the second screen, including a first area 81, a first area 82, a first area 83, a first area 84, a first area 85, and First area 86.
  • the electronic device determines the amount of change and the area of the sensing parameter of each first region shown in FIG. 11C, where the amount of change of the sensing parameter of the first region 81, the first region 82, the first region 83, and the first region 84 is greater than
  • the first threshold and the area are both greater than the second threshold, the amount of change in the sensing parameter of the first region 85 is less than the first threshold, and the area of the first region 86 is less than the second threshold.
  • the electronic device determines that the first area with the change of the sensing parameter greater than the first threshold and the area greater than the second threshold is the first target area.
  • the first target area includes a first area 81, a first area 82, and a first area. A region 83 and a first region 84.
  • the electronic device may determine the gesture of the electronic device being grasped according to the first target area, similar to FIG. 10B, according to the first target area shown in FIG. 11C, the electronic device may determine that the gesture of the electronic device being grasped is Hold with one hand in the left hand.
  • the above solution takes into account both the amount of change of the sensing parameter and the area of the first region, which can further reduce the influence of external interference and improve the accuracy of subsequent gestures for determining that the electronic device is grasped.
  • the operation of determining the gesture of grasping the electronic device according to the position of the first area on the second screen is disclosed, wherein the gesture of grasping the electronic device often includes multiple And the screens of different electronic devices are often different. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the gesture of grasping the electronic device can be determined in a variety of ways.
  • the second screen of the electronic device usually includes multiple forms.
  • the second screen of the electronic device includes a side area of the electronic device.
  • the second screen is the side area of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device adopts a folding screen that includes a first display screen and a second display screen.
  • a folding screen that includes a first display screen and a second display screen.
  • the first display screen and the second display screen are in an unfolded state, that is, the first display
  • the display screen and the second display screen are spliced into one display screen, that is, when the first display screen and the second display screen are shown in Figure 4A
  • the spliced display screen can be used as the first screen
  • the side of the spliced display screen The area is the second screen, that is, the electronic device adopts a folding screen.
  • the second screen includes the side area of the electronic device.
  • both of the two display screens can be used as The first screen, and the side areas of the two display screens are respectively used as the second screen, that is, the electronic device adopts a folding screen.
  • the second screen includes side areas of the first display screen and the second display screen respectively.
  • the state of the folding screen (that is, the expanded state or the folded state) needs to be determined.
  • the included angle between the first display screen and the second display screen can be determined. When the included angle between the first display screen and the second display screen is 180 degrees, it is determined that the The state of the folding screen is the unfolded state, and when the angle between the first display screen and the second display screen is not 180 degrees, it is determined that the state of the folding screen is the folded state.
  • the angle between the first display screen and the second display screen may be compared with an angle threshold (for example, 10 degrees), when the first When the included angle between the display screen and the second display screen is greater than the angle threshold, it is considered that the included angle between the first display screen and the second display screen is larger, and the first display screen and the second display screen The screen is in the state of Figure 4C.
  • an angle threshold for example, 10 degrees
  • one or more sensors may be provided in the electronic device, and the angle between the first display screen and the second display screen can be determined based on the data detected by the one or more sensors .
  • a gyroscope and an acceleration sensor may be provided on the first display screen and the second display screen of the electronic device.
  • the gyroscope provided on the first display screen can detect the rotational angular velocity when the first display screen rotates, and the acceleration sensor in the first display screen can detect the acceleration generated when the first display screen moves.
  • the gyroscope provided on the second display screen can detect the rotational angular velocity when the second display screen rotates, and the acceleration sensor in the second display screen can detect the acceleration generated when the second display screen moves. Then, based on the rotational angular velocity and acceleration of the first display screen and the rotational angular velocity and acceleration of the second display screen, the angle between the first display screen and the second display screen can be calculated.
  • the gestures include the following steps:
  • Step S121 Determine the long axis area and the short axis area in the first area located in the side area of the electronic device according to the length of the first area located in the side area of the electronic device, wherein the The long axis area is a first area in the first area whose length is greater than or equal to a third threshold, and the short axis area is a first area in the first area whose length is less than or equal to a fourth threshold.
  • the third threshold is equal to the fourth threshold.
  • the first area is divided into two types according to the length, that is, the long-axis area and the short-axis area.
  • the long-axis area When a user is holding an electronic device, usually the user's thumb, thenar or palm will touch the side area of one side of the electronic device, so that a long axis area appears at the position of the side area of one of the sides. , That is, the long axis area corresponds to the position where the thumb, the thenar or the palm touches the side area when the user grips the electronic device.
  • the rest of the fingers often touch the side area on the other side of the electronic device, so that a short axis area appears at the position of the side area on the other side, that is, the short axis area corresponds to when the user grips the electronic device. Where other fingers touch the side area.
  • the length of the first area is the maximum length of the first area along the long side of the electronic device.
  • the third threshold and the fourth threshold are determined in advance.
  • the big data collection method can be used to obtain the length of the side area of the thumb, the thenar or the palm of multiple users when holding the electronic device with one hand, as well as the contact side of the fingers other than the thumb. Based on the length of the edge region, the third threshold and the fourth threshold are determined.
  • the third threshold and the fourth threshold may also be determined in other ways, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Step S122 When the long-axis area and the short-axis area are located in different side areas, respectively, the number of the long-axis area and the short-axis area is determined.
  • the electronic device determines the number of long-axis areas and short-axis areas on each side area.
  • the electronic device executes step 123.
  • the electronic device determines that the gesture of the electronic device being grasped is a vertical holding with both hands.
  • the thumb, thenar or the palm, and other fingers other than the thumb are located on different sides, that is, the long axis area and the short axis area should be located on different side areas. If the long axis area and any one of the short axis areas are located on the same side area, it indicates that the long axis area or any one of the short axis areas is not an area where the sensing parameter changes caused by the user grasping the electronic device. It cannot be used to determine whether an electronic device is being grasped. Therefore, in the above steps, when it is determined that the long axis area and the short axis area are located in different side areas, respectively, the number of the long axis area and the short axis area is determined.
  • Step S123 When there is only one long-axis area, the number of short-axis areas is not greater than n, and the long-axis area and the short-axis area are both located in the first part of the electronic device, determine the electronic device The gesture that the device is grasped is the first one-hand grasping handshake gesture.
  • the electronic device divides the first part and the second part along a dividing line, and the direction of the dividing line is parallel to the width direction of the electronic device.
  • the dividing line is located in the middle of the electronic device.
  • the dividing line divides the electronic device into two parts, an upper half area and a lower half area. The first part is the lower half of the electronic device, and the first part is the upper half of the electronic device.
  • the black portion is the first area in the side area, and the first area includes a long axis area 91 and a short axis area 92. .
  • the dotted line in FIG. 13 is the dividing line.
  • n is a preset positive integer.
  • the thumb, thenar or palm, and other fingers other than the thumb are located on different sides. In this case, there is only one long axis area, and the fingers touching the side areas usually Because there are no more than four fingers other than the thumb, n can usually be set to 4.
  • the change of the sensing parameter in the long-axis area is not caused by the user's grasping of the electronic device.
  • the number of short-axis regions is greater than n, it indicates that the change in the sensing parameters of the short-axis regions is not caused by the user's grasp of the electronic device. In both cases, there is no need to determine the gesture that the electronic device is grasped through the first area.
  • step S121 to step S123 it can be known that when there is only one long-axis area, the number of short-axis areas is not greater than n, and both the long-axis area and the short-axis area are located in the first part of the electronic device.
  • the gesture of the electronic device being grasped is the first one-handed grasping handshake gesture.
  • the first one-handed grasping handshake gesture refers to grasping the electronic device with one hand (for example, a right-handed vertical hold or a left-handed vertical hold), and the user is grasping the first part of the electronic device.
  • the adjusting the position of the touch area in the second screen according to the gesture of the electronic device being grasped includes The following steps:
  • the second area located in the second part of the first side area and the distance from the long axis area is the first distance h1, where the first side area is where the long axis area is located The side area.
  • the first side area is the right side area.
  • the distance between two regions refers to the shortest distance between the two regions.
  • the line between any two points of the two regions can be determined, and the length of the shortest line in each line is the distance between the two regions.
  • the shortest distance between the two areas refers to the shortest distance between the two areas along the long side of the electronic device.
  • the second side area is the side where the short axis area is located. Edge area.
  • the second side area is the side area on the left side.
  • the first touch area is adjusted to the second area and/or the third area, wherein the first touch area is a touch area located in a side area of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device determines the gripping The gesture is the first one-handed handshake gesture.
  • the electronic device determines that the first touch area is located in the upper half of the side area 1 and the upper half of the side area 2.
  • the shortest distance between the long axis area and the first touch area in the side area 1 is h1
  • the shortest distance between the short axis area and the first touch area in the side area 2 is h2.
  • the second area and the third area are both areas away from the palm of the user.
  • the first touch area can be adjusted to the second area or the third area.
  • the first touch area can also be divided into a first sub-touch area and a second sub-touch area, the first sub-touch area and the second sub-touch area
  • the second touch area corresponds to different functions and is adjusted to the second area and the third area respectively.
  • the function corresponding to the first touch area includes brightness adjustment and volume adjustment
  • it may be determined that the function corresponding to the first sub-touch area is brightness adjustment
  • the first sub-touch area is adjusted to the second sub-touch area.
  • the function corresponding to the second sub-touch area is volume adjustment
  • adjust the second sub-touch area to the third area when the function corresponding to the first touch area includes brightness adjustment and volume adjustment.
  • FIG. 14 discloses a schematic diagram of the first one-handed grasping handshake gesture shown in FIG. 14.
  • positions 101 such as the thumb, the thenar or the palm are included.
  • the long axis area appears, and the fingers 102 other than the thumb are included.
  • the short axis area appears.
  • FIG. 14 includes the second area located in the second part of the first side area and the distance from the long axis area is the first distance h1, because the second area is connected to the thumb and the big thenar.
  • FIG. 15 includes a third area located in the second part of the second side area and whose distance from the short axis area is the second distance h2, because this third area is related to other areas except the thumb.
  • the distance between the fingers is h2, and the third area can be far away from fingers other than the thumb. Therefore, after the first touch area is adjusted to the second area and/or the third area, the user's finger usually no longer causes false touches on the first touch area.
  • first distance h1 and the second distance h2 may be the same distance or different distances, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the second screen of the electronic device includes the side area of the electronic device.
  • determining the gesture of grasping the electronic device includes the following steps:
  • Step S124 Determine the long axis area and the short axis area in the first area located in the side area of the electronic device according to the length of the first area located in the side area of the electronic device, wherein the The long axis area is an area in the first area whose length is not less than a third threshold, and the short axis area is a first area in the first area whose length is not greater than a fourth threshold.
  • Step S125 When the long-axis area and the short-axis area are located in different side areas, respectively, the number of the long-axis area and the short-axis area is determined.
  • step S124 to step S125 may be the same as the operation process from step S121 to step S122, which can be referred to each other, and will not be repeated here.
  • Step S126 When there is only one long-axis area, the number of short-axis areas is not more than n, and the short-axis area occupies the first part and the second part of the electronic device at the same time, and the long-axis area is located at the same time.
  • the gesture of the electronic device being grasped is the second one-handed grasping handshake gesture.
  • the electronic device divides the first part and the second part along a dividing line, and the direction of the dividing line is parallel to the width direction of the electronic device.
  • the dividing line is located in the middle of the electronic device.
  • the dividing line divides the electronic device into two parts, an upper half area and a lower half area. The first part is the lower half of the electronic device, and the first part is the upper half of the electronic device.
  • the black portion is the first area in the side area, and the first area includes a long axis area 121 and a short axis area 122. .
  • the dotted line in FIG. 16 is the dividing line.
  • n is a preset positive integer.
  • the thumb, thenar or palm, and other fingers other than the thumb are located on different sides. In this case, there is only one long axis area, and the fingers touching the side areas usually Because there are no more than four fingers other than the thumb, n can usually be set to 4.
  • the change of the sensing parameter in the long-axis area is not caused by the user's grasping of the electronic device.
  • the number of short-axis regions is greater than n, it indicates that the change in the sensing parameters of the short-axis regions is not caused by the user's grasp of the electronic device. In both cases, there is no need to determine the gesture that the electronic device is grasped through the first area.
  • step S124 to step S126 when there is only one long-axis area, the number of short-axis areas is not greater than n, and the short-axis area occupies the first part and the second part of the electronic device at the same time,
  • the long axis area is located in the first part of the electronic device, it is determined that the gesture of grasping the electronic device is a second one-handed grasping handshake gesture.
  • the second one-hand grasping handshake gesture refers to grasping the electronic device with one hand, and the position of the thumb, the thenar or the palm is located in the first part of the electronic device, and a part of the fingers other than the thumb is located in the electronic device. The first part of the device, the other part is located in the second part of the electronic device.
  • the adjusting the position of the touch area in the second screen according to the gesture of the electronic device being grasped includes The following steps:
  • the fourth area located in the second part of the first side area and the distance from the long axis area is the third distance h3, where the first side area is where the long axis area is located.
  • the side area wherein, in FIG. 16, the first side area is the right side area.
  • the first touch area is adjusted to the fourth area, where the first touch area is a touch area located in a side area of the electronic device.
  • the determined fourth area is farther from the thumb, the thenar or the palm, etc., so that the first touch area can be reduced. ⁇ accidental touch.
  • the short axis area occupies the first part and the second part of the electronic device at the same time, the side area where the short axis area is located is no longer used as the first touch area, thereby avoiding false touches of the first touch area by the finger .
  • FIG. 17 includes the second portion located in the first side area and the fourth area whose distance from the long axis area is the third distance h3, and includes the short axis area.
  • the distance between the thumb, the thenar or the palm is the third distance h3, and the fourth area can be far away from the thumb, the thenar or the palm. Therefore, after the first touch area is adjusted to the fourth area, the user's finger usually no longer accidentally touches the first touch area.
  • the electronic device when the long axis area is located in the lower half area of one side area, and part or all of the short axis area is located in the upper half area of the other side area, the electronic device The gesture to determine the grasp is the second one-hand grasping handshake gesture.
  • the electronic device determines that the first touch area is located in the upper half of the side area 1.
  • the shortest distance between the long axis area and the first touch area in the side area 1 is h3. It can be understood that all the side areas 2 are non-touch areas.
  • the third distance h3 may be the same distance as the first distance h1 or the second distance h2, or may be a distance different from both the first distance h1 and the second distance h2.
  • the embodiment of the application does not limit this.
  • the second screen of the electronic device includes the side area of the electronic device.
  • determining the gesture of grasping the electronic device includes the following steps:
  • Step S127 If the electronic device is in a landscape state, when the number N of the first area located in the side area of the electronic device is a positive integer not greater than 4 and not less than 2, and the electronic device is located When the first regions of the side regions of are respectively located in different corners of the electronic device, the area of the first region is obtained.
  • N is a positive integer not greater than 4 and not less than 2, that is, the value of N is 2, 3, or 4.
  • N is not greater than 4.
  • N is not greater than 4.
  • Step S128 When the area of the first area is all within the preset first area range, it is determined that the gesture of the electronic device being grasped is a horizontal screen grasping handshake gesture.
  • the first area is generated by the user's different fingers contacting the side area, because the area of the contact surface formed by the finger on the side area needs to be within a certain range (that is, the preset first area range) ), in this case, when the area of the first area obtained in step S127 is all within the preset first area range, it indicates that the first area is all caused by the user's grasping hand gesture, Therefore, it can be determined that the gesture of the electronic device being grasped is a horizontal screen grasping handshake gesture.
  • the first area range needs to be determined in advance.
  • the large data collection method can be used to obtain the area of the side area where the finger touches the side area when multiple users are holding the four corners of the electronic device, and the first area range is determined accordingly.
  • the first area range can also be determined in other ways, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • step S127 to step S1208 it can be determined whether the gesture of the electronic device being grasped is a horizontal screen grasping handshake gesture.
  • the number of the first area is 4, that is, the horizontal screen grasping handshake gesture is determined by the user's four handshake gestures.
  • the fingers such as the thumb and index finger of both hands
  • FIG. 19 a schematic diagram of the first area is shown in FIG. 19.
  • the black part is It is the first area in the side area, and there are four first areas, and the four first areas are respectively located at the four corners of the electronic device.
  • the adjusting the position of the touch area on the second screen according to the gesture of the electronic device being grasped includes the following steps :
  • the first touch area is adjusted to the fifth area, where the first touch area is a touch area located in a side area of the electronic device.
  • the first touch area is adjusted to the fifth area, and the distance between the fifth area and the first area is not less than the first area.
  • the distance between the adjusted first touch area and the first area is not less than the fourth distance h4, that is, the adjusted first touch area is far away from the palm of the user, so as to avoid the adjustment The first touch area was touched by mistake.
  • the embodiment of the present application discloses a schematic diagram of the horizontal screen grasping handshake as shown in FIG. 20.
  • the number of the first areas is set to four, and they are located at the four corners of the electronic device.
  • the distance between the fifth area and each first area is not less than the fourth distance h4.
  • the method when the electronic device is in a non-horizontal state, after determining the fifth area located in the side area of the electronic device, the method further includes:
  • the adjusting the touch area to the fifth area includes:
  • the first touch area is adjusted to the fifth area in the side area above the electronic device.
  • the electronic device When the electronic device is in the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device is still in a non-horizontal state, when the user makes a horizontal screen grasping handshake, usually the thumb is placed on the side area under the electronic device, and the index finger is placed on the top of the electronic device The side area. Compared with the thumb, the index finger is usually more flexible. Therefore, the touch function of the side area under the electronic device is temporarily terminated. Instead, the first touch area is adjusted to the side area above the electronic device. A touch area is adjusted to the fifth area in the upper side area, so as to facilitate the user's index finger to perform a touch operation on the first touch area.
  • the adjusted first touch area is far away from the four corners of the electronic device, correspondingly, it is farther away from the user’s finger. In this case, it is not easy to touch the first touch area. Thereby, it is avoided that the finger touches the first touch area by mistake.
  • the determination of the gesture of grasping the electronic device according to the position of the first area on the second screen includes the following steps :
  • Step S129 Determine the long axis area and the short axis area in the first area located in the side area of the electronic device according to the length of the first area located in the side area of the electronic device, wherein the The long axis area is an area in the first area whose length is not less than a third threshold, and the short axis area is a first area in the first area whose length is not greater than a fourth threshold.
  • step S129 is the same as the operation process of step S121, which can be referred to each other, and will not be repeated here.
  • Step S130 Obtain a first proportion of the long-axis area in the second part of the electronic device that occupies the long-axis area, and obtain the short-axis area in the second part of the electronic device that occupies the short-axis The second proportion of the area.
  • Step S131 When the first ratio and the second ratio are both greater than a fifth threshold, it is determined that the gesture of the electronic device being grasped is a third one-handed grasping handshake gesture.
  • first ratio and the second ratio are both greater than the fifth threshold, it indicates that when the user is holding the electronic device, most of the thenar, thumb, or palm is located in the second part of the electronic device, and Most of the fingers other than the thumb are also located in the second part of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device divides the first part and the second part along a dividing line, and the direction of the dividing line is parallel to the width direction of the electronic device. Generally, the dividing line is located in the middle of the electronic device. When the electronic device is placed in a vertical state, the dividing line divides the electronic device into two parts, an upper half area and a lower half area. The first part is the lower half of the electronic device, and the first part is the upper half of the electronic device.
  • the first area corresponding to the third one-handed grasping handshake is shown in FIG. 22.
  • the black part is the first area in the side area. It includes a long axis area 181 and a short axis area 182.
  • the dotted line in FIG. 22 is the dividing line.
  • the electronic device determines that the grasping gesture is the third one-hand grasping handshake gesture.
  • the gesture of the electronic device being grasped is the third one-handed handshake gesture
  • the position of the touch area in the second screen is adjusted according to the gesture of the electronic device being grasped , Including the following steps:
  • suspending the touch function of a certain touch area means that even if the touch area receives a touch operation, the electronic device no longer executes the function corresponding to the touch area.
  • FIG. 23 The third schematic diagram of the one-handed grasping handshake gesture is shown in FIG. 23.
  • positions 191 such as the thumb, the thenar or the palm are included, which causes the long axis area to appear when contacting the electronic device, and It includes fingers 192 other than the thumb, and when the other fingers 192 touch the electronic device, a short axis area appears.
  • the first ratio and the second ratio are both greater than the fifth threshold, it indicates that most of the user's palm, thumb, or thenar is located in the second part of the electronic device, except for the thumb Most of the other fingers are also located in the second part of the electronic device.
  • the user's grasp of the electronic device this time is usually an abnormal operation of the user. Therefore, it is determined that the touch function of the side area is suspended , Thereby avoiding false touches on the first touch area.
  • the second screen includes the side area of the electronic device
  • the method of adjusting the first touch area wherein the first touch area is a touch area located in a side area of the electronic device.
  • the second screen may also include the back area of the electronic device.
  • the back area of the electronic device is provided with a corresponding touch area. In the embodiment of the present application, it is set in the back area of the electronic device.
  • the touch area in the back area can be referred to as the second touch area.
  • the second screen when an electronic device uses a surround screen, the second screen includes both the side area and the back area of the electronic device. In this case, when the user is holding the electronic device, it may also cause a false touch to the second touch area.
  • the electronic device may also use a folding screen.
  • the folding screen includes a first display screen and a second display screen. When the first display screen and the second display screen are in a folded state, and the first display screen and the second display screen are in a folded state.
  • the angle between the two display screens is small, that is, when the schematic diagram of the first display screen and the second display screen is shown in FIG. 4B, one of the first display screen and the second display screen is usually used as the display
  • the screen, the display screen is the first screen, used to display the picture.
  • the other display is the back of the electronic device. In this case, the other display screen and the side area of the electronic device are used as the second screen.
  • the second screen includes the back area of the electronic device
  • the gesture for determining the grasping of the electronic device according to the position of the first area on the second screen includes the following step:
  • Step S132 Determine the area of the first area located on the back area of the electronic device.
  • Step S133 When the area of the first area is within the second area range, determine the ratio of the area of the first area in the second part of the electronic device to the area of the first area.
  • the electronic device divides the first part and the second part along a dividing line, and the direction of the dividing line is parallel to the width direction of the electronic device.
  • the dividing line is located in the middle of the electronic device.
  • the dividing line divides the electronic device into two parts, an upper half area and a lower half area. The first part is the lower half of the electronic device, and the first part is the upper half of the electronic device.
  • Step S134 When the ratio is greater than a sixth threshold, determine that the gesture of the electronic device being grasped is a fourth one-handed grasping handshake gesture, and when the ratio is not greater than the sixth threshold, determine that the electronic device The grasped gesture is the fifth one-handed grasping handshake gesture.
  • FIGS. 25 and 26 respectively.
  • the black part is The first area in the side area.
  • the dotted lines in FIGS. 25 and 26 are the dividing lines.
  • the schematic diagram of the first area is shown in FIG. 25.
  • the fourth one-hand grasping handshake gesture refers to grasping the electronic device with one hand, and most of the area of the user's palm is located in the second part of the electronic device.
  • the schematic diagram of the first area is shown in FIG. 26. According to FIG. 26, it can be seen that the fourth one-handed grasping handshake gesture refers to grasping the electronic device with one hand, and most of the area of the user's palm is located in the first part of the electronic device.
  • the adjusting the position of the touch area in the second screen according to the gesture of the electronic device being grasped includes The following steps:
  • the fourth one-handed grasping handshake gesture refers to one-handed grasping of the electronic device, and most of the area of the user's palm is located in the second part of the electronic device, that is, a schematic diagram of the fourth one-handed grasping handshake gesture is shown in Fig. 27 Shown.
  • the user's grasp of the electronic device this time is usually an abnormal operation of the user. Therefore, it is determined that the touch function of the back area is suspended, so as to avoid a false touch to the second touch area.
  • the adjusting the position of the touch area in the second screen according to the gesture of the electronic device being grasped includes The following steps:
  • the second touch area is adjusted to the sixth area, where the second touch area is a touch area located in a side area of the electronic device.
  • the fifth one-handed grasping handshake gesture refers to one-handed grasping of the electronic device, and most of the area of the user's palm is located in the first part of the electronic device, that is, a schematic diagram of the fifth one-handed grasping handshake gesture is shown in FIG. 28 shown.
  • the adjusted second touch area can be far away from the user's palm, thereby avoiding false touches on the second touch area.
  • the electronic device needs to determine the included angle between the first display screen and the second display screen, and when the included angle between the first display screen and the second display screen is relatively small The electronic device then determines that one of the display screens is the back area of the electronic device.
  • one or more sensors may be provided in the electronic device, and the angle between the first display screen and the second display screen can be determined based on the data detected by the one or more sensors .
  • a gyroscope and an acceleration sensor may be provided on the first display screen and the second display screen of the electronic device.
  • the gyroscope provided on the first display screen can detect the rotational angular velocity when the first display screen rotates, and the acceleration sensor in the first display screen can detect the acceleration generated when the first display screen moves.
  • the gyroscope provided on the second display screen can detect the rotational angular velocity when the second display screen rotates, and the acceleration sensor in the second display screen can detect the acceleration generated when the second display screen moves. Then, based on the rotational angular velocity and acceleration of the first display screen and the rotational angular velocity and acceleration of the second display screen, the angle between the first display screen and the second display screen can be calculated.
  • the included angle between the first display screen and the second display screen After determining the included angle between the first display screen and the second display screen, compare the included angle between the first display screen and the second display screen with an angle threshold (for example, 10 degrees). When the included angle between the first display screen and the second display screen is less than the angle threshold, it is generally considered that the included angle between the first display screen and the second display screen is small, and one of the display screens is determined to be the display Screen to display the picture, and another display screen is used as the back area of the electronic device.
  • an angle threshold for example, 10 degrees
  • the other display screen can also be used as a second screen so that the user can touch it.
  • the first display screen is set as the display screen
  • the second display screen is set as the second screen
  • a second touch area is provided
  • the second touch area is used to adjust the volume and brightness.
  • the electronic device can determine the gesture of grasping the electronic device through the operations of step S132 to step S134, and adjust the second touch area according to the gesture of grasping the electronic device.
  • the electronic device needs to determine which of the folding screens is the second screen. Since the display screen of the electronic device needs to display pictures for the user to watch, the display screen in the folding screen is usually a display screen facing the user, and accordingly, another display screen is used as the second screen. That is, among the first display screen and the second display screen, the display screen that is not facing the user belongs to the second screen. Accordingly, the electronic device can determine the second screen of the first display screen and the second display screen in a variety of ways.
  • the gesture of grasping the electronic device when a folding screen is applied to the electronic device, and the included angle between the first display screen and the second display screen included in the folding screen is less than an angle threshold, the gesture of grasping the electronic device further includes the following steps:
  • an infrared sensor When an infrared sensor is provided in the first display screen, determining whether the infrared sensor provided in the first display screen detects an infrared signal radiated by the human body;
  • the infrared sensor provided in the first display screen detects the infrared signal, it is determined that the second display screen belongs to the second screen.
  • the infrared sensor set in the first display screen detects the infrared signal radiated by the human body, it indicates that the first display screen faces the user. In this case, it can be determined that the first display screen is a display screen.
  • the second display screen is a second screen.
  • the electronic device can also determine whether the infrared sensor set in the first display screen and the infrared sensor set in the second display screen detect To detect the infrared signal radiated by the human body, and determine that the display screen corresponding to the infrared sensor that does not detect the infrared signal radiated by the human body belongs to the second screen.
  • the gesture of grasping the electronic device further includes the following steps:
  • the camera set in the first display screen captures a face image
  • the camera set in the first display screen captures a face image, it indicates that the first display screen faces the user. In this case, it can be determined that the first display screen is the display screen.
  • the second display screen belongs to the second screen.
  • the electronic device may also determine whether the camera set in the first display screen and the camera set in the second display screen have captured the face. Image, and it is determined that the display screen corresponding to the camera that has not captured the face image belongs to the second screen.
  • the gesture of grasping the electronic device further includes the following steps:
  • the second display screen belongs to the second screen.
  • the user will often block the display screen facing the user, resulting in the decrease of the intensity of the ambient light received by the display screen facing the user.
  • the first intensity of the ambient light detected by the proximity light sensor set in the display screen when the user uses the electronic device, and to set the first intensity including the first A range of light intensity.
  • the first display screen is a display screen, and the corresponding second display screen belongs to the second screen.
  • the electronic device may also determine the proximity light sensor set in the first display screen and the proximity light sensor set in the second display screen, respectively. Whether the ambient light detected by the sensor is within the preset light intensity range, and it is determined that the display screen corresponding to the proximity light sensor that is not within the preset light intensity range belongs to the second screen.
  • the electronic device may also determine the display screen of the folding screen that is not facing the user in other ways, and determine that the display screen belongs to the second screen, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method further includes:
  • the touch area is adjusted to the initial position.
  • the initial position is the position where the touch area is located before the position of the touch area in the second screen is adjusted according to the gesture of the electronic device being grasped.
  • the touch area when the area of the first area decreases, it indicates that the user will no longer grasp the electronic device, so that the touch area can be adjusted to the initial position. In this case, since the user will no longer grasp the electronic device, even if the touch area is adjusted to the initial position, it will not cause a false touch on the touch area of the second screen. Moreover, when the touch area is in the initial position, it is often closer to the user's usage habits, thereby facilitating the user's use and improving the user's experience.
  • the side screen can receive a user's touch operation.
  • the electronic device can control the display content on other screens of the electronic device, and can also realize the function of the electronic device. Adjustment of parameters (for example, display brightness, turning on and off of Bluetooth, turning on and off of flash).
  • Touch operation 1 can be operations such as single click, double click, long press, and sliding.
  • the side screen of the electronic device displays a control
  • the electronic device detects a touch operation 1 acting on the control, and in response to the touch operation 1, activates the function 1 triggered by the touch operation 1.
  • a control frame 201 is displayed on the side screen.
  • the control frame 201 includes a memo icon 201A, a voice assistant icon 201B, and a screenshot icon 201C. .
  • the memo icon 201A can receive a user's touch operation (for example, a click operation), and in response to the above touch operation, the electronic device can display a memo interface.
  • a user's touch operation for example, a click operation
  • the smart assistant icon 201B can receive a user's touch operation (for example, a click operation), and in response to the above touch operation, the electronic device can start the voice assistant.
  • a user's touch operation for example, a click operation
  • the screenshot icon 201C can receive a user's touch operation (for example, a single click operation).
  • a user's touch operation for example, a single click operation
  • the electronic device can take a screenshot of the interface currently displayed on the display screen 194 and save it.
  • the side screen of the electronic device does not display controls, and the electronic device can recognize the touch operation 2 based on the touch trajectory of the touch operation 2 on the side screen, the touch duration, etc., to determine and start the Function 2 triggered by touch operation 2.
  • the volume adjustment box 202 may include a volume adjustment bar 202A, a volume type 202B, and a volume setting control 202C.
  • the volume type 202B is used to characterize the volume type corresponding to the volume adjustment bar 202A, such as ringtones, alarms, and media.
  • the length of the shaded part in the volume adjustment bar 202A is used to represent the current volume of the volume type 202B.
  • the volume setting control 202C can receive a touch operation (for example, a single-click operation), and in response to the above-mentioned user operation, the electronic device can display a volume setting interface.
  • a touch operation for example, a single-click operation
  • the electronic device can display a volume setting interface.
  • the user's finger slides upward on the side screen 23, and the electronic device responds to the detected user operation, increases the volume of the ringtone based on the distance the user slides, and adjusts the volume The length of the shaded part of the bar.
  • the functions triggered by the touch operation on the side screen may also include functions such as taking photos, answering calls, recording screens, and quick payment.
  • the corresponding relationship between the aforementioned touch operation and the function triggered by the touch operation can be determined in multiple ways.
  • the aforementioned corresponding relationship can be the default setting of the electronic device when it leaves the factory, or it can be a user-defined setting. Yes, it may also be determined by the electronic device according to the currently running application, or determined by the electronic device according to the frequency of use of the application function by the user, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the following describes how to determine the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen based on the contact surface of the electronic device held by the user.
  • the vertical holding state means that the user mainly grasps the electronic device by grasping the side surface corresponding to the long side of the electronic device, and the side surface corresponding to the long side of the electronic device may be equipped with a side screen.
  • the horizontal holding state means that the user mainly grasps the electronic device by grasping the side corresponding to the short side of the electronic device.
  • the vertical holding state may include left-hand vertical holding, right-hand vertical holding, and two-hand vertical holding, etc.; the horizontal holding state may include left-hand horizontal holding, right-hand horizontal holding, and two-hand horizontal holding, etc.
  • the electronic device when the electronic device does not detect the touch input of holding the side screen, the electronic device can determine that all the side screens are touchable areas, that is, the electronic device can respond to the touch input for the side screen. Touch input and execute the function corresponding to the touch input. Exemplarily, as shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, in response to a double-click operation on the side screen 23, the electronic device may display the volume adjustment frame 202.
  • FIG. 31A it is a schematic diagram of a left hand holding an electronic device longitudinally according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 31B shows a schematic view of the contact surface in a state where the left hand is held vertically with one hand.
  • the electronic device includes a side screen 1 and a side screen 2.
  • the contact area between the user and the display 194 may include: a large thenar contact surface 301 formed by the large thenar of the palm on the side screen 1.
  • the user's other fingers that is, fingers other than the thumb
  • the contact area between the user and the display screen 194 may further include the finger grip contact surface 303 formed by the user's thumb on the side screen 1.
  • the user's other fingers may include one or more of the four fingers of the index finger, the middle finger, the ring finger, and the little finger.
  • the other fingers in contact with the side screen 1 include the above four fingers, and the contact surface set 302 includes a finger grip contact surface 302A, a finger grip contact surface 302B, and a finger grip contact surface 302B corresponding to the four fingers respectively.
  • Finger grasping contact surface set 302C, finger grasping contact surface 302D may include one or more of the four fingers of the index finger, the middle finger, the ring finger, and the little finger.
  • the other fingers in contact with the side screen 1 include the above four fingers
  • the contact surface set 302 includes a finger grip contact surface 302A, a finger grip contact surface 302B, and a finger grip contact surface 302B corresponding to the four fingers respectively.
  • Finger grasping contact surface set 302C, finger grasping contact surface 302D may include one or more of the four fingers of the index finger, the middle finger, the ring finger, and
  • the contact surfaces in the contact surface set 302 are arranged in order along the long side of the electronic device.
  • the maximum distance between two adjacent contact surfaces in the contact surface set 302 is less than the distance threshold 1.
  • FIG. 31C shows a schematic diagram of the contact surface in a vertical holding state with the left hand.
  • the electronic device includes a side screen 1, and the contact area between the user and the display screen 194 may include a large thenar contact surface 301, and may also include a finger grip contact surface 303.
  • the contact surface formed with the side screen when the user holds the electronic device may be referred to as the side contact surface.
  • 31B shows the large thenar contact surface 301
  • the finger grip contact surface 302A, the finger grip contact surface 302B, the finger grip contact surface 302C, the finger grip contact surface 302D, and the finger grip contact surface 303 are all sides.
  • the side screen includes part or all of the side contact surface.
  • the side screen 1 includes all of the large thenar contact surface 301
  • the side screen 2 includes all of the finger grip contact surface 302B.
  • the finger grip contact surface 302D formed by the user holding the electronic device has different characteristics from the user's normal touch operation (for example, single click, double tap) to form the finger click contact surface.
  • a finger grip contact surface formed by a user holding an electronic device has a larger touch area and a longer touch time.
  • FIG. 32A it is a schematic diagram of a right hand holding an electronic device vertically according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 32B shows a schematic diagram of the contact surface corresponding to FIG. 32A.
  • the contact area between the user and the display 194 may include: the large thenar contact surface 401 formed by the side screen 2 and the large thenar of the palm , The contact surface set 402 formed by the user's other fingers and the side screen 1.
  • the contact area between the user and the display screen 194 may further include a finger grip contact surface 403 formed by the side screen 2 and the thumb.
  • the user's other fingers in contact with the side screen 2 may include one or more of the four fingers of the index finger, the middle finger, the ring finger, and the little finger.
  • the other fingers grasping the side screen 1 include three fingers, and the contact surface set 402 includes the finger grasping contact surface 402A, the finger grasping contact surface 402B, and the fingers corresponding to the above three fingers respectively. Grasp the contact surface 402D.
  • FIG. 32C shows a schematic diagram of the contact surface in the vertical holding state of the right hand.
  • the electronic device includes a side screen 1, and the contact area between the user and the display screen 194 may include a set of contact surfaces 402.
  • FIG. 33A it is a schematic diagram of holding an electronic device vertically with both hands according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 33B shows the contact corresponding to FIG. 33A.
  • the contact area between the user and the side screen of the display 194 may include: the large thenar contact surface 501 formed by the side screen 1 and the large thenar of the palm, and the large thenar contact surface 501 formed by the side screen 2 and the palm of the hand.
  • the contact area between the user and the display 194 may also include: the finger grip contact surface 503 formed by the side screen 1 and the thumb, and the side screen 2 formed by the thumb The fingers grip the contact surface 504.
  • the contact surface of the vertical holding state with both hands can refer to FIG. 31C.
  • FIG. 34A it is a schematic diagram of a left hand holding an electronic device horizontally according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 34B shows the contact corresponding to FIG. 34A.
  • the contact area between the user and the display 194 may include the finger grip contact surface 601 formed by the left end of the side screen 1 and the user's fingers, and the left end of the side screen 2 formed by the mouth of the tiger Tiger mouth contact surface 602.
  • the side screen 1 is located above the side screen 2.
  • Fig. 34C and Fig. 34D show schematic diagrams of the contact surface in the horizontal holding state of the left hand.
  • the side screen 1 is located above other screens of the electronic device, and the contact area between the user and the display screen 194 may include a finger grip contact surface 601 formed by the left end of the side screen 1 and the user's fingers.
  • the side screen 1 is located below other screens of the electronic device, and the contact area between the user and the display screen 194 may include a tiger's mouth contact surface 602 formed by the left end of the side screen 1 and the tiger's mouth.
  • the finger grip contact surface and the tiger's mouth contact surface shown in FIGS. 34B to 34D are both side contact surfaces.
  • FIG. 35A it is a schematic diagram of a right hand holding an electronic device horizontally according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 35B shows the contact corresponding to FIG. 35A.
  • the contact area between the user and the display 194 may include the finger grip contact surface 603 formed by the right end of the side screen 1 and the user's fingers, and the right end of the side screen 2 formed by the mouth of the tiger Tiger mouth contact surface 604.
  • the side screen 1 is located above the side screen 2.
  • FIGS. 35C and 35D show schematic diagrams of the contact surface in the horizontally holding state of the right hand.
  • the side screen 1 is located above other screens of the electronic device, and the contact area between the user and the display screen 194 may include a finger grip contact surface 603 formed by the right end of the side screen 1 and the user's fingers.
  • the side screen 1 is located below the other screens of the electronic device, and the contact area between the user and the display screen 194 may include a tiger's mouth contact surface 604 formed by the right end of the side screen 1 and the tiger's mouth.
  • FIG. 36A it is a schematic diagram of holding an electronic device with both hands horizontally according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 36B shows the contact corresponding to FIG. 36A.
  • the contact area between the user and the display 194 may include the finger grip contact surface 701 formed by the left end of the side screen 1 and the user's fingers, and the left end of the side screen 2 is in contact with the mouth of the tiger.
  • Surface 702; the right end of the side screen 1 and the user's fingers formed a finger grip contact surface 703, and the right end of the side screen 2 and the tiger's mouth formed a tiger's mouth contact surface 704.
  • the side screen 1 is located above the side screen 2.
  • FIGS. 36C and 36D show schematic diagrams of the contact surface in a state where both hands are held horizontally.
  • the side screen 1 is located above other screens of the electronic device.
  • the contact area between the user and the display 194 may include: a finger grip contact surface 701 formed by the left end of the side screen 1 and the user's fingers, and the side The right end of the screen 1 and the finger grip contact surface 703 formed by the user's finger. As shown in FIG.
  • the side screen 1 is located below the other screens of the electronic device, and the contact area between the user and the display 194 may include: a contact surface 702 formed by the left end of the side screen 2 and the mouth of the tiger, and the contact surface of the side screen 1 The tiger's mouth contact surface 704 formed by the right end and the tiger's mouth.
  • the electronic device including two side screens shown in FIGS. 31A to 36C may be the electronic device configured with a curved screen in FIG. 5A, or the electronic device configured with a surround screen in FIG. 6A.
  • the electronic device including one side screen shown in FIGS. 31A to 36C may be the electronic device configured with a folding screen in FIG. 7A, and the side screen 1 may be the side screen 53 in FIG. 7A.
  • FIGS. 31A to 33B it can be seen from FIGS. 31A to 33B that for an electronic device equipped with two side screens, when the user holds the electronic device vertically, at least one side screen has a contact surface with the palm of the hand.
  • a side screen that has a contact surface with the palm of the hand, and a side screen has a contact surface with one or more of the user's fingers other than the thumb;
  • both side screens have contact surfaces with the large thenar of the palm.
  • the contact surface between the user and the side screen is located at one or both ends of the side screen.
  • the two side screens each have a contact surface at the same end, namely the finger grip contact surface and the tiger’s mouth contact surface; the user's hands are horizontally
  • both ends of the upper side screen are two-finger gripping contact surfaces
  • the two ends of the lower side screen are two tiger-mouth contact surfaces.
  • the distance between the contact surfaces at both ends of a side screen is generally greater than the distance threshold 1.
  • the electronic device may use the acceleration sensor and/or the gyroscope sensor to obtain the horizontal and vertical screen status of the electronic device, thereby determining whether the electronic device is in the vertical screen state or the horizontal screen state, and the status of the side screen 1 and the side screen 2.
  • the positional relationship, for example, the side screen 1 is located above the side screen 2.
  • that the contact surface is located on the side screen may mean that part or all of the contact surface is located on the above-mentioned side screen.
  • gripping states shown in FIGS. 31A to 36D are exemplary descriptions of various gripping states provided by the embodiments of the present application, and do not limit the embodiments of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application may also include other holding states, which are not specifically limited here.
  • the following specifically describes how to determine the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen based on the contact surface of the electronic device held by the user.
  • the touch information of the contact surface may include the position of the contact surface, the height along the long side of the electronic device, the width along the long side of the electronic device, the area of the contact surface, the capacitance information of the contact surface, and the contact surface.
  • One or more of the information such as the touch time of the face.
  • the capacitance information of the contact surface may include the capacitance signal of each coordinate point in the touch array corresponding to the contact surface, for example, the capacitance change of each coordinate point.
  • the touch information of the contact surface may also include other parameters, which are not specifically limited here.
  • the electronic device may determine the type of the contact surface based on the touch information of the side contact surface.
  • the types of the side contact surface formed by the user holding the electronic device may include: large thenar contact surface, finger grip contact surface, finger grip contact surface, tiger mouth contact surface, and the like.
  • the electronic device can adaptively adjust the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen based on the position of the side contact surface in the side screen and the touch information of the side contact surface .
  • the specific implementation manners for determining the touch area and the non-touch area on the side screen may include, but are not limited to, the following two implementation manners.
  • the electronic device may determine the touch area and the non-touch area on the side screen based on the position of the side contact surface on the side screen and the touch information of the side contact surface.
  • the electronic device can determine the user's holding state based on the position of the side contact surface and the position of the side contact surface in one or two side screens, and then determine the holding state of the electronic device in the holding state. Touch area and non-touch area in the two side screens.
  • the gripping surface of the user's palm when the user holds the electronic device vertically, also includes the display screen, that is, the back screen.
  • the electronic device can determine the touch area and the non-touch area in the two side screens of the electronic device based on the touch information of the contact surface between the user's palm and the back screen.
  • the specific determination of the touch area and the non-touch area of the side screen may include, but is not limited to, Case 1 to Case 6.
  • the electronic device determines that the side contact surface of the side screen includes the large thenar contact surface based on the touch information of the side contact surface, and the electronic device determines the side based on the position of the large thenar contact surface. The position of the touch area and non-touch area on the side screen.
  • the electronic device determines that the side contact surface of the side screen 1 includes the large thenar contact surface 301.
  • the electronic device determines the touch area 1 of the side screen 1 Located between the top of the side screen 1 and the thenar contact surface 301, the area on the side screen 1 except for the touch area 1 is the non-touch area 1.
  • the non-touch area 1 is the non-touch area 1.
  • the electronic device determines that the side screen 1 is the non-touch area 1.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the large thenar contact surface 301 in FIGS. 37A and 37C is equal to the distance 1.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the top of the side screen 1 is distance 2.
  • L1 is equal to half the length of the long side of the display screen; distance 1 can be equal to the height of 5 coordinate points; distance 2 is equal to the height of 0 or 3 coordinate points.
  • the height of the coordinate point refers to the height of a grid in the touch screen array of the touch sensor 50 along the long side of the electronic device
  • the width of the coordinate point refers to the height of the aforementioned grid along the short side of the electronic device. width.
  • the electronic device determines that the electronic device is in the horizontal screen state.
  • the electronic device determines the side screen 1
  • the touch area 1 of is located between the top (or bottom) of the side screen and the large thenar contact surface 301, and the area of the side screen 1 except for the touch area 1 is the non-touch area 1.
  • the electronic device determines that the side screen 1 is the non-touch area 1.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the thenar contact surface 301 is equal to the distance 1.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the top (or bottom) of the side screen is distance 2.
  • the side screens 1 are all non-touch areas 1.
  • the top end of the side screen 1 refers to the top boundary line of the side screen 1
  • the bottom end of the side screen 1 refers to the bottom boundary line of the side screen 1.
  • the distance between the contact surface and the top end of the side screen 1 may refer to the shortest distance between the contact surface and the top boundary line of the side screen 1; the distance between the contact surface and the bottom end of the side screen 1 may refer to the contact surface and the bottom end of the side screen 1
  • the top boundary line of the side screen 1 coincides with the extension line of the top boundary line of the front screen
  • the bottom boundary line of the side screen 1 coincides with the extension line of the bottom boundary line of the front screen.
  • the electronic device determines that the side contact surface of the side screen includes a contact surface set based on the touch information of the side contact surface.
  • the electronic device determines the positions of the touch area and the non-touch area on the side screen based on the position of the set of contact surfaces.
  • the electronic device determines that the side contact surface of the side screen 2 includes a contact surface set 302.
  • the contact surface set 302 includes at least 4 finger gripping contact surfaces, and the minimum distance between any two adjacent contact surfaces is less than the distance threshold 1.
  • the electronic device determines that the touch area 2 of the side screen 2 is located on the side. Between the top of the side screen 2 and the set of contact surfaces 302, the area on the side screen 2 except for the touch area 2 is the non-touch area 2. As shown in FIGS.
  • the electronic device determines that the side screen 2 is the non-touch area 2.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 2 and the contact surface set 302 in FIGS. 37A and 37B is equal to the distance 3.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 2 and the top of the side screen 2 is distance 4.
  • L2 is equal to half the length of the long side of the display screen; distance 3 can be equal to the height of 5 coordinate points; distance 4 is equal to 0 or the height of 3 coordinate points.
  • the side screen when the side screen includes the contact surface set 302, the side can also be determined by the above-mentioned embodiment.
  • the touch area and non-touch area of the screen will not be repeated here.
  • the electronic device determines that it is in the horizontal screen state of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device determines the side screen 2
  • the touch area 2 is located between the top (or bottom) of the side screen and the contact surface set 302.
  • the area on the side screen 2 except the touch area 2 is the non-touch area 2.
  • the electronic device determines that the side screen 2 is the non-touch area 2.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 2 and the set of contact surfaces 302 is equal to the distance 3.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 2 and the top (or bottom) of the side screen 2 is distance 4.
  • the side screens 2 are all non-touch areas 2.
  • the electronic device determines that the side contact surface of the side screen includes the finger grip contact surface based on the touch information of the side contact surface, and the finger grip contact surface is between the finger grip contact surface and one end of the side screen.
  • the electronic device determines, based on the position where the finger grips the contact surface, that the touch area of the side screen is located between the end of the side screen and the finger grip contact surface.
  • an electronic device with two side screens as shown in FIG. 38A and an electronic device with one side screen as shown in FIG. 38B when the side screen 1 includes a finger grip contact surface 601, and the finger
  • the electronic device determines that the touch area 1 of the side screen 1 is located between the right end of the side screen and the finger grip contact surface 601.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the finger grip contact surface 601 is equal to the distance 7. In some embodiments, the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the top right end of the side screen is equal to the distance 8.
  • the electronic device determines, based on the touch information of the side contact surface, that the side contact surface of the side screen includes a tiger's mouth contact surface, and the distance between the tiger's mouth contact surface and one end of the side screen is greater than or equal to L6 At this time, the electronic device determines, based on the position of the contact surface of the tiger's mouth, that the touch area of the side screen is located between the end of the side screen and the contact surface of the tiger's mouth.
  • an electronic device configured with two side screens as shown in FIG. 38A, when the left end of the side screen 2 includes a tiger's mouth contact surface 602, and the distance between the tiger's mouth contact surface 602 and the top of the right end of the side screen 2 is greater than
  • the electronic device determines that the touch area 2 of the side screen 2 is located between the right end of the side screen and the contact surface 602 of the tiger's mouth.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 2 and the contact surface 602 of the tiger's mouth is equal to the distance 9.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the top right end of the side screen is equal to the distance 10.
  • the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen can also be determined through the above-mentioned implementation manner, which will not be repeated here.
  • the side screen includes a two-finger grasping contact surface, and when the shortest distance between the two fingers grasping the contact surface is greater than or equal to L7, the electronic device determines that the touch area of the side screen is located Hold the two fingers between the contact surfaces.
  • the left end of the side screen 1 includes a finger grip contact surface 701, and the right end includes a finger grip contact surface 703.
  • the electronic device determines that the touch area 1 of the side screen 1 is located between the finger grip contact surface 701 and the finger grip contact surface 703.
  • the electronic device determines that the side screen 1 is a non-touch area 1.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the finger grip contact surface 701 is equal to the distance 7, and the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the finger grip contact surface 703 is also a distance 7.
  • the side screen includes two mouth contact surfaces, and when the shortest distance between the two mouth contact surfaces is greater than or equal to L8, the electronic device determines that the touch area of the side screen is located between the two mouth contact surfaces. Between the faces.
  • the left end of the side screen 2 includes a tiger's mouth contact surface 702, and the right end includes a tiger's mouth contact surface 704.
  • the electronic device determines the touch area 2 of the side screen 2 Located between the tiger's mouth contact surface 702 and the tiger's mouth contact surface 704.
  • the electronic device determines that the side screen 2 is the non-control area 2 .
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 2 and the tiger’s mouth contact surface 702 is equal to the distance 9
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the tiger’s mouth contact surface 704 is also the distance 9.
  • the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen can also be determined through the above-mentioned implementation manners, which will not be repeated here.
  • the electronic device determines that a side screen includes two contact surfaces, and the electronic device determines that the side screen is a non-touch area.
  • the electronic device determines that the electronic device is in a horizontal screen state, and a side screen includes two contact surfaces, and the electronic device determines that the side screen is a non-touch area.
  • the specific determination of the touch area and the non-touch area of the side screen may include, but is not limited to, Case 7 to Case 12.
  • the electronic device includes two side screens, when the side contact surface of one side screen includes a large thenar contact surface, and the side contact surface of the other side screen includes a set of contact surfaces , The electronic device determines that the user holds the electronic device vertically with one hand. Then, the electronic device determines the touch area and non-touch area of each side screen based on the location of the thenar contact surface and the contact surface assembly on the side screen.
  • the electronic device includes a side screen 1 and a side screen 2.
  • the side contact surface of the side screen 1 includes a large thenar contact surface 301
  • the side of the side screen 2 When the edge contact surface includes the contact surface set 302, the electronic device determines that the user's left hand holds the electronic device vertically. Then, the electronic device determines the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen based on the positions of the thenar contact surface 301 and the contact surface set 302 on the side screen.
  • the electronic device determines that the touch area 1 of the side screen 1 is located between the top of the side screen 1 and the thenar contact surface 301, and the touch area 2 of the side screen 2 is located on the side screen 1. Between the top and the contact surface set 302. As shown in FIG.
  • the electronic device determines the side The side screen 1 is a non-touch area 1, and the touch area 2 of the side screen 2 is located between the top of the side screen 2 and the contact surface set 302. As shown in FIG.
  • the electronic device determines the side The touch area 1 of the side screen 1 is located between the top of the side screen 1 and the thenar contact surface 301, and the side screen 2 is a non-touch area. As shown in FIG.
  • the electronic device determines the side The screen 1 is the non-touch area 1, and the side screen 2 is the non-touch area 2.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the thenar contact surface 301 is equal to the distance 1.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 2 and the set of contact surfaces 302 is equal to the distance 3.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the top of the side screen is distance 2
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 2 and the top of the side screen is distance 4.
  • the electronic device determines that the side contact surface of the side screen 1 includes the large thenar contact surface, and the side contact surface of the side screen 2 includes the contact surface collection of the finger gripping contact surface
  • the electronic device determines that the user's right hand holds the electronic device vertically. Then, the electronic device determines the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen based on the location of the thenar contact surface and the contact surface assembly on the side screen.
  • how to determine the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen in the vertical holding state of the right hand can refer to the related embodiments of the left hand vertical holding, which will not be repeated here.
  • the electronic device includes two side screens.
  • the side contact surfaces of the two side screens both include large thenar contact surfaces
  • the electronic device determines that the user holds the electronic device with both hands in the vertical direction. Then, the electronic device determines the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen based on the position of the thenar contact surface of each side screen.
  • the electronic device determines that the side contact surface of the side screen 1 includes the large thenar contact surface 501, and the side contact surface of the side screen 2 also includes the large thenar contact surface 502 .
  • the electronic device determines that the user holds the electronic device vertically with both hands. Then, the electronic device determines the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen based on the positions of the thenar contact surface 501 and the thenar contact surface 502 on the side screen.
  • the electronic device determines that the touch area 1 of the side screen 1 is located between the top of the side screen 1 and the large thenar contact surface 501, and the touch area 2 is located between the top of the side screen 2 and the large thenar contact surface 502. As shown in FIG. 40A, when the shortest distance between the thenar contact 501 and the top of the side screen 1 is greater than or equal to L1, and the shortest distance between the thenar contact 502 and the top of the side screen 2 is also greater than or equal to L1, the electronic device It is determined that the touch area 1 of the side screen 1 is located between the top of the side screen 1 and the large thenar contact surface 501, and the touch area 2 is located between the top of the side screen 2 and the large thenar contact surface 502. As shown in FIG.
  • the electronic device determines that the side screen 1 is a non-touch area 1, and the touch area 2 of the side screen 2 is located between the top of the side screen 2 and the thenar contact surface 502. As shown in FIG.
  • the electronic device determines that the touch area 1 of the side screen 1 is located between the top of the side screen 1 and the thenar contact surface 301, and the side screen 2 is a non-touch area. As shown in FIG.
  • the electronic device determines that the side screen 1 is the non-touch area 1, and the side screen 2 is the non-touch area 2.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the thenar contact surface 501 is equal to the distance 1.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the thenar contact surface 502 is equal to the distance 1.
  • the distance between the touch area 1 and the top of the side screen is distance 2
  • the distance between the touch area 2 and the top of the side screen is distance 2.
  • the electronic device includes two side screens.
  • the electronic device determines that the side contact surface of one side screen includes a finger grip contact surface, and the side contact surface of the other side screen includes a tiger's mouth contact.
  • the distance between the finger grip contact surface and the top end of the side screen is greater than or equal to L5
  • the distance between the tiger’s mouth contact surface and the top end of the same end of the other side screen is greater than or equal to L6
  • the electronic device determines that the user holds it horizontally with one hand Electronic equipment.
  • the electronic device determines the touch area and non-touch area of each side screen based on the positions of the finger grip contact surface and the tiger's mouth contact surface.
  • the electronic device determines that the side contact surface of the side screen 1 only includes the finger grip contact surface 601, and the side contact surface of the side screen 2 only Including the tiger’s mouth contact surface 602, the distance between the finger grip contact surface 601 and the top of the right end of the side screen 1 is greater than or equal to L5, and the distance between the tiger’s mouth contact surface 602 and the top of the right end of the side screen 2 is greater than or equal to L6, the electronic device determines The user holds the electronic device horizontally to the left.
  • the electronic device determines that the touch area 1 of the side screen 1 is located between the right end of the side screen 1 and the finger grip contact surface 601, and determines that the touch area 2 of the side screen 2 is located at the right end of the side screen 2 and the contact surface of the tiger’s mouth Between 602.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the finger grip contact surface 601 is equal to the distance 7
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 2 and the tiger’s mouth contact surface 602 is equal to the distance 9.
  • the electronic device determines that the electronic device is in a landscape state, the side screen 1 is located above the side screen 2, and the side contact surface of the side screen 1 only includes the finger grip contact surface 601, and the side screen 2
  • the side contact surface only includes the tiger’s mouth contact surface 602
  • the distance between the finger grip contact surface 601 and the top of the right end of the side screen 1 is greater than or equal to L5
  • the distance between the tiger’s mouth contact surface 602 and the top of the right end of the side screen 2 is greater than
  • L6 the electronic device determines that the user's left hand holds the electronic device horizontally.
  • the electronic device determines that the touch area 1 of the side screen 1 is located between the right end of the side screen 1 and the finger grip contact surface 601, and determines that the side screen 2 is the non-touch area 2.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the finger grip contact surface 601 is equal to the distance 7.
  • the side screen includes a two-finger gripping contact surface, and when the distance between the one finger gripping contact surface and the top of one end of the side screen is less than the distance threshold 2, the other finger gripping When the distance between the contact surface and the top end of the other end of the side screen is also less than the distance threshold 2, the electronic device determines that the user holds the electronic device with both hands horizontally. Then, the electronic device determines the touch area and the non-touch area of the side screen based on the position where the finger grips the contact surface.
  • the left end of the side screen 1 includes a finger grip contact surface 701, and the right end includes a finger grip contact surface 703.
  • the electronic device determines that the user holds the electronic device with both hands horizontally. Then, as shown in FIGS.
  • the electronic device determines that the touch area 1 of the side screen 1 is located on the finger grip contact surface 701 and the finger grip the contact surface 703. As shown in FIGS. 39C and 39D, when the shortest distance between the finger grip contact surface 701 and the finger grip contact surface 703 is less than L7, the electronic device determines that the side screen 1 is the non-touch area 1.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the finger grip contact surface 701 is equal to the distance 7, and the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the finger grip contact surface 703 is also a distance 7.
  • the electronic device determines that the electronic device is in a landscape state, and the side screen 1 includes a finger grip contact surface 701 and a finger grip contact surface 703.
  • the finger grip contact surface 701 is connected to the left end of the side screen 1.
  • the electronic device determines that the user holds the electronic device with both hands horizontally. Then, the electronic device determines the touch area and the non-touch area of the side screen based on the position where the finger grips the contact surface. Specifically, reference may be made to the above-mentioned embodiment. I won't repeat them here.
  • the side screen includes two tiger mouth contact surfaces, and when the distance between one tiger mouth contact surface and the top of one end of the side screen is less than the distance threshold 3, the other tiger mouth contact surface and the side screen When the distance between the top end of the other end is also less than the distance threshold 3, the electronic device determines that the user holds the electronic device with both hands horizontally. Then, the electronic device determines the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen based on the position of the contact surface of the tiger's mouth.
  • the left end of the side screen 2 includes a tiger's mouth contact surface 702, and the right end includes a tiger's mouth contact surface 704.
  • the electronic device determines that the user's hands are horizontally Hold the electronic device. Then, as shown in FIGS.
  • the electronic device determines that the touch area 2 of the side screen 2 is located on the tiger’s mouth contact surface 702 Between the contact surface 704 and the tiger’s mouth.
  • the electronic device determines that the side screen 2 is the non-control area 2. Among them, the shortest distance between the touch area 2 and the two contact surfaces of the tiger's mouth is equal to the distance 9.
  • the electronic device determines that a side screen includes two contact surfaces, and the electronic device determines that the user holds the electronic device with both hands horizontally. Then, the electronic device determines that the side screens are all non-touch areas.
  • the electronic device determines that the electronic device is in a horizontal screen state, and one side screen includes two contact surfaces, and the electronic device determines that the user holds the electronic device with both hands horizontally. Then, the electronic device determines that the side screens are all non-touch areas.
  • the electronic device includes two side screens.
  • One side screen includes two finger grip contact surfaces, and the other side screen includes two tiger mouth contact surfaces.
  • the electronic device determines the user's hands Hold the electronic device horizontally. Then, the electronic device determines the touch area and non-touch area of each side screen based on the position of the finger grip contact surface and the tiger's mouth contact surface.
  • the electronic device determines that the user holds the electronic device with both hands horizontally.
  • the left end of the side screen 1 includes a finger grip contact surface 701
  • the right end of the side screen 1 includes a finger grip
  • the left end of the side screen 2 includes the tiger's mouth contact surface 702
  • the right end of the side screen 2 includes the tiger's mouth contact surface 704
  • the electronic device determines that the user holds the electronic device with both hands horizontally.
  • the electronic device determines that the touch area 1 of the side screen 1 is located between the finger grip contact surface 701 and the finger grip contact surface 703, and the touch area 2 of the side screen 2 is located between the tiger’s mouth contact surface 702 and the tiger’s mouth contact surface 704 .
  • the touch area 1 of the side screen 1 is located between the finger grip contact surface 701 and the finger grip contact surface 703 and the touch area 2 of the side screen 2 is located between the tiger’s mouth contact surface 702 and the tiger’s mouth contact surface 704 .
  • the electronic The device determines that the side screen 1 is a non-touch area 1, and the touch area 2 of the side screen 2 is located between the Hukou contact surface 702 and the Hukou contact surface 704. In some embodiments, as shown in FIG.
  • the electronic The device determines that the touch area 1 of the side screen 1 is located between the finger grip contact surface 701 and the finger grip contact surface 703, and the side screen 2 is the non-touch area 2.
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 1 and the contact surface of the two fingers is equal to the distance 7
  • the shortest distance between the touch area 2 and the contact surface of the two jaws is equal to the distance 9.
  • the electronic device determines that the side screens 2 are all non-touch areas 2.
  • the determination of the touch area and the non-touch area of the side screen may specifically include but is not limited to the following situations.
  • FIGS. 41A to 41D show schematic diagrams of the contact surface 304 between the palm of the user and the back screen of the electronic device. It can be understood that since the palm is not flat, the formed contact surface can also be irregular, and the contact surface 304 can also be composed of multiple independent contact surfaces.
  • the contact surface 304 is only a schematic diagram provided by the embodiment of the present application. The embodiment of this application does not constitute a limitation.
  • the electronic device determines that the user holds the electronic device vertically with one hand based on the touch information of the contact surface 304 of the back screen, thereby determining the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen.
  • the side screen 1 when the shortest distance between the left side of the contact surface 304 and the top of the display screen 194 is greater than or equal to L3, the side screen 1 includes the touch area 1, and the touch area 1 and the contact surface 304 The shortest distance on the left side of is a distance of 5, and the distance between the touch area 1 and the top of the side screen is a distance of 6. As shown in FIG. 41B, when the shortest distance between the left side of the contact surface 304 and the top of the display screen 194 is less than L3, the side screen 1 is the non-touch area 1.
  • the side screen 2 when the shortest distance between the right side of the contact surface 304 and the top of the display screen 194 is greater than or equal to L3, the side screen 2 includes the touch area 2, and the touch area 2 and the touch The shortest distance on the left side of the surface 304 is a distance of 5, and the distance between the touch area 2 and the top of the side screen is a distance of 6. As shown in FIGS. 41C and 41D, when the shortest distance between the right side of the contact surface 304 and the top of the display screen 194 is less than L3, the side screen 2 is the non-touch area 2. It can be seen from FIG.
  • the side screen 1 and the side screen 2 are both non-touch areas.
  • the back screen when the user holds the electronic device vertically, the back screen can also interact with the user.
  • the electronic device can also determine the touch area and non-touch area of the back screen based on the position of the contact surface 304.
  • the back screen when the shortest distance between the contact surface 304 and the top of the display screen 194 is greater than or equal to L4, the back screen includes the touch area 3, and the touch area 3 and the contact surface 304 are along the long side of the electronic device.
  • the shortest distance is distance 11.
  • the back screen when the shortest distance between the contact surface 304 and the top of the display screen 194 is less than L4, the back screen is a non-touch area.
  • any two parameters of distance 1, distance 3, distance 5, distance 7 and distance 9 may be equal or unequal; among the distance 2, distance 4, distance 6, distance 7 and distance 8 Any two parameters can be equal or unequal; any two parameters of L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, and L6 can be equal or unequal; L7 and L8 can be equal or unequal. There are no specific restrictions here.
  • L1 may also be called the first preset value
  • L2 may also be called the second preset value
  • L5 may also be called the third preset value
  • L6 may also be called the fourth preset value
  • the preset value, L7 may also be referred to as the fifth preset value
  • L8 may also be referred to as the sixth preset value.
  • the touch operation 1 acting on the side screen can trigger the function 1
  • the touch operation 2 acting on the side screen can trigger the function 2.
  • the electronic device after the electronic device determines the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen based on the user's holding contact surface, the electronic device only responds to touch operations on the touch area of the side screen.
  • the side screen of the electronic device displays controls, and the electronic device determines the touch area of the side screen based on the user's holding contact surface, and adjusts the above controls to be displayed in the touch area of the side screen .
  • the electronic device detects the touch operation 1 acting on the above-mentioned control in the touch area, and in response to the above-mentioned touch operation 1, activates the function 1 triggered by the touch operation 1.
  • the control frame 201 for adjusting the side screen is displayed in the touch area of the side screen.
  • the side screen of the electronic device does not display controls, and the electronic device determines the touch area of the side screen based on the user's holding contact surface.
  • the electronic device can recognize the touch operation 2 based on the touch trajectory of the touch operation 2 on the touch area of the side screen, the touch duration, etc., and thereby determine and start the function 2 triggered by the touch operation 2.
  • the electronic device determines the touch area of the side screen based on the user's holding contact surface, and the touch area of the side screen can interact with the user to provide preset functions of the side screen , That is, the touch operation that triggers the preset function needs to act on the touch area of the side screen.
  • FIG. 44 it is a schematic diagram of the capacitance of the upper side contact surface of the touch sensor of the screen provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the darker the coordinate point in Fig. 44 indicates the stronger the capacitance signal value.
  • Different types of side contact surfaces have different characteristics of touch information.
  • a finger click on the contact surface in a normal touch operation has the following characteristics: the capacitive signal at the center of the contact surface is the strongest, and the capacitive signal at the edge is weaker; the contact surface is elliptical; the width of the contact surface is small, and the contact surface The difference between the width and the height of the contact surface is small.
  • the width is the width of 3 coordinate points, and the height is the height of 3 coordinate points.
  • the finger grip contact surface in the side contact surface has the following characteristics: the characteristics and shape of the capacitive signal of the contact surface are similar to the above-mentioned finger click contact surface; compared to the above-mentioned finger click contact surface, the user holds The pressing force when the mobile terminal forms a finger grip on the contact surface is greater, therefore, the area of the contact surface is larger, and the touch time of the contact surface is longer.
  • the width is the width of 3 coordinate points
  • the height is the height of 4 coordinate points.
  • the large thenar contact surface in the side contact surface has the following characteristics: the capacitive signal of the most edge coordinate column of the contact surface is the strongest, and the farther away from the side of the display screen, the weaker the capacitive signal, and the signal change trend is smoother; The shape is elongated; the height of the contact surface is large, and the difference between the width of the contact surface is large.
  • the width is the width of 3 coordinate points
  • the height is the height of 12 coordinate points.
  • the finger gripping contact surface in the side contact surface has the following characteristics: Compared with the finger tapping the contact surface, the capacitive signal of the most edge coordinate column of the contact surface closest to the side screen is weaker, and the farther away from the side of the display screen. The weaker the capacitance signal, and the larger the signal change trend; the shape of the contact surface is elongated; the width of the contact surface is smaller than that of a finger click on the contact surface; the height of the contact surface is smaller than the larger thenar contact surface. For example, the width is the width of 2 coordinate points, and the height is the height of 4 coordinate points.
  • the tiger’s mouth contact surface in the side contact surface has the following characteristics: similar to the large thenar contact surface, the capacitive signal of the most edge coordinate column closest to the side screen in the contact surface is the strongest, and the farther the capacitive signal is from the side of the display screen.
  • the width is the width of 3 coordinate points
  • the height is the height of 6 coordinate points.
  • the electronic device can use a neural network to train the type of side contact surface, and then can recognize the type of side contact surface.
  • the width of the contact surface is the maximum length of the contact surface along the short side of the mobile terminal
  • the height of the contact surface is the maximum length of the contact surface along the long side of the mobile terminal.
  • the most edge coordinate column of the contact surface is the coordinate column closest to the long side of the mobile terminal in the touch screen array corresponding to the contact surface on the touch screen of the mobile terminal.
  • the secondary edge coordinate column of the contact surface is the second coordinate column closest to the long side of the mobile terminal in the touch screen array corresponding to the contact surface on the touch screen of the mobile terminal.
  • the capacitance signal strength can also be referred to as the capacitance value; the contact surface can also be referred to as the contact area.
  • the electronic device may first eliminate the interfering contact surface among the contact surfaces on the touch screen according to the touch information of the contact surface. In some embodiments, the electronic device may determine that the contact surface whose average value of the capacitance signal is less than or equal to the first threshold is the interference contact surface. In some embodiments, the electronic device may determine that a contact surface with an area less than or equal to the second threshold is an interference contact surface. In some embodiments, the electronic device may determine that the contact surface whose average value of the capacitance signal is less than or equal to the first threshold and the area is less than or equal to the second threshold is the interference contact surface.
  • the electronic device may determine the type of the contact surface based on the characteristics of the touch information of the side contact surface.
  • the types of side contact surfaces include, but are not limited to, large thenar contact surfaces, finger click contact surfaces, finger grip contact masks, and tiger mouth contact surfaces.
  • the first preset condition is that the height of the side contact surface is greater than the first height threshold. In an implementation manner, the first preset condition is that the height of the side contact surface is greater than the first height threshold, and the capacitance signal strength of the outermost coordinate column of the side contact surface and the capacitance signal strength of the secondary edge coordinate column The ratio of is within the first ratio range, where the value within the first ratio range is greater than or equal to 1.
  • the first preset condition is that the ratio of the height of the side contact surface to the width of the side contact surface is greater than the first height ratio, and the capacitance signal strength of the outermost coordinate column of the side contact surface The ratio of the capacitance signal intensity to the secondary edge coordinate column is within the first ratio range, where the value within the first ratio range is greater than or equal to 1.
  • the first preset condition is that the ratio of the height to the width of the side contact surface is greater than the first height ratio, and the area of the side contact surface is greater than the first area threshold.
  • the first preset condition is that the ratio of the height to the width of the side contact surface is greater than the first height ratio, the area of the side contact surface is greater than the first area threshold, and the minimum value of the side contact surface is The ratio of the capacitance signal intensity of the edge coordinate column to the capacitance signal intensity of the secondary edge coordinate column is within the first ratio range, wherein the value in the first ratio range is greater than or equal to 1.
  • the first height ratio is equal to 5; the first ratio range is greater than 1 and less than or equal to 1.1; the height threshold is the height of 6 coordinate points, and the first area threshold is the area of 15 coordinate points.
  • the capacitance signal strength of the most edge coordinate column of the contact surface refers to the average value of the capacitance signal strength of all coordinate points in the most edge coordinate column of the contact surface; the capacitance signal strength of the secondary edge coordinate column of the contact surface refers to the contact surface The average value of the capacitance signal strength of all coordinate points in the secondary edge coordinate column of.
  • the contact surface is a finger grip contact surface.
  • the second preset condition is that the height of the side contact surface is within the first height range, and the ratio of the capacitance signal strength of the most edge coordinate column of the side contact surface to the capacitance signal strength of the secondary edge coordinate column Within the second ratio range, where the value in the second ratio range is greater than 1.
  • the second preset condition is that the height of the side contact surface is within the first height range, and the ratio of the height to the width of the side contact surface is within the third ratio range.
  • the second preset condition is that the height of the side contact surface is within the first height range, the ratio of the height to the width of the side contact surface is within the third ratio range, and the minimum value of the side contact surface is The ratio of the capacitance signal strength of the edge coordinate column to the capacitance signal strength of the secondary edge coordinate column is within the second ratio range, where the value in the second ratio range is greater than 1.
  • the second preset condition is that the area of the side contact surface is within the first area range, the ratio of the height to the width of the side contact surface is within the third ratio range, and the minimum value of the side contact surface is The ratio of the capacitance signal strength of the edge coordinate column to the capacitance signal strength of the secondary edge coordinate column is within the second ratio range, where the value in the second ratio range is greater than 1.
  • the value in the first height range is less than the first height threshold; the value in the second ratio range is greater than or equal to the value in the first ratio range; the value in the third ratio range is less than The first height ratio; the value in the first area range is less than the first area threshold.
  • the first height range is the height of 3 to 5 coordinate points
  • the first ratio range is greater than 1.1 and less than or equal to 1.3
  • the third ratio range is 2 to 3
  • the first area range is the area of 6 to 12 coordinate points.
  • the contact surface is a finger grip contact surface.
  • the third preset condition is that the height of the side contact surface is within the second height range, and the ratio of the capacitance signal strength of the most edge coordinate column of the side contact surface to the capacitance signal strength of the secondary edge coordinate column In the fourth ratio range, where the value in the fourth ratio range is less than 1.
  • the second preset condition is that the height of the side contact surface is within the second height range, and the ratio of the height to the width of the side contact surface is within the fifth ratio range.
  • the second preset condition is that the height of the side contact surface is within the third height range, the ratio of the height to the width of the side contact surface is within the fifth ratio range, and the minimum value of the side contact surface is The ratio of the capacitance signal strength of the edge coordinate column to the capacitance signal strength of the secondary edge coordinate column is within the fourth ratio range, wherein the value in the fourth ratio range is less than 1.
  • the third preset condition is that the area of the side contact surface is within the second area range, the ratio of the height to the width of the side contact surface is within the fifth ratio range, and the minimum value of the side contact surface is The ratio of the capacitance signal strength of the edge coordinate column to the capacitance signal strength of the secondary edge coordinate column is within the fourth ratio range, wherein the value in the fourth ratio range is less than 1.
  • the value in the second height range is less than the first height threshold; the value in the fifth ratio range is less than the first height ratio, and the value in the fifth ratio range is less than or equal to the third A value within the ratio range; a value within the second area range is less than the first area threshold. In one implementation, the second height range is equal to the first height range.
  • the second height range is the height of 3 to 5 coordinate points
  • the first ratio range is greater than 0.8 and less than or equal to 1
  • the third ratio range is 1 to 2
  • the second area range is the area of 4 to 12 coordinate points.
  • the touch information of the side contact surface meets the fourth preset condition, it is determined that the contact surface is a tiger's mouth contact surface.
  • the fourth preset condition is that the height of the side contact surface is within the third height range, and the ratio of the capacitance signal strength of the most edge coordinate column of the side contact surface to the capacitance signal strength of the secondary edge coordinate column In the sixth ratio range, where the value in the sixth ratio range is greater than 1.
  • the fourth preset condition is that the height of the side contact surface is within the third height range, and the ratio of the height to the width of the side contact surface is within the seventh ratio range.
  • the fourth preset condition is that the height of the side contact surface is within the third height range, the ratio of the height to the width of the side contact surface is within the seventh ratio range, and the maximum value of the side contact surface is The ratio of the capacitance signal strength of the edge coordinate column to the capacitance signal strength of the secondary edge coordinate column is within the sixth ratio range, where the value in the sixth ratio range is greater than 1.
  • the fourth preset condition is that the area of the side contact surface is within the third area range, the ratio of the height to the width of the side contact surface is within the seventh ratio range, and the minimum value of the side contact surface is The ratio of the capacitance signal strength of the edge coordinate column to the capacitance signal strength of the secondary edge coordinate column is within the sixth ratio range, where the value in the sixth ratio range is greater than 1.
  • the value in the third height range is less than or equal to the first height threshold, the value in the third height range is greater than or equal to the value in the first height range, and the value is greater than or equal to the second height range
  • the value in the sixth ratio range is less than or equal to the value in the second ratio range; the value in the seventh ratio range is less than the first height ratio and greater than or equal to the value in the fifth ratio range;
  • the value in the three area range is greater than or equal to the value in the second area range, and is greater than or equal to the value in the third area range.
  • the sixth ratio range is equal to the first ratio range.
  • the third height range is the height of 4 to 8 coordinate points
  • the sixth ratio range is greater than 1 and less than or equal to 1.1
  • the seventh ratio range is 1 to 3
  • the second area range is 6 to 15 coordinate points.
  • the embodiment of the present application may also identify the contact surface type through other implementation methods, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method includes but is not limited to steps S201 to S205.
  • the electronic device receives a first touch input acting on the touch screen of the electronic device.
  • S202 The electronic device determines the first contact surface of the first touch input, and acquires touch information of the first contact surface.
  • the electronic device determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area on the touch screen of the electronic device; wherein the distance between the first touch area and the first contact surface is The distance is the first distance value, and the first non-touch area includes the first contact surface.
  • the electronic device receives the second touch mode input acting on the first touch area; the electronic device displays the first user interface in response to the second touch mode input.
  • the electronic device receives the third touch input that acts on the first non-touch area; the electronic device responds to the third touch input, and the display content of the electronic device does not change.
  • the first touch input may be the touch input of the user's hand holding the electronic device, and the first contact surface may be formed with the touch screen when the user's hand is holding the electronic device. Contact area.
  • the first contact surface may be the side contact surface formed by the user's hand and the side screen.
  • the first contact surface may also be the contact formed by the user's hand and the back screen. surface.
  • the first contact surface is located on the first side screen of the touch screen, and based on the touch information of the first contact surface, the electronic device determines the first touch area on the first side screen And the first non-touch area, the area outside the first touch area in the first side screen is the first non-touch area.
  • the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is a large thenar contact surface; refer to FIG. 37A, FIG. 37C, and FIG. 40A and 40C, when the distance between the thenar contact surface and the first end of the first side screen is greater than or equal to the first preset value, the electronic device determines that the first touch area is located at the first end of the first side screen Between the contact surface with the thenar.
  • the first side screen may be the side screen 1 shown, and the first touch area may be the touch area 1.
  • the first side screen may be On the side screen 2, the first touch area may be the touch area 2; the first end of the side screen may be the top of the electronic device; the first preset value may be L1; the first distance value may be distance 1.
  • the first end of the first side screen may also be the top or bottom end of the first side screen.
  • the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is a finger grip contact surface, and the first contact surface is a contact surface with the electronic device.
  • the electronic device determines the first touch The control area is located between the first end of the first side screen and the finger grip contact surface.
  • the first side screen may be the side screen 2 shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B, the first touch area may be the touch area 2; the first end of the first side screen may be the top of the electronic device;
  • the second preset value may be L2; the first distance value may be distance 3.
  • the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is a finger grip contact surface; referring to FIGS. 38A and 38B, when When the distance between the finger grip contact surface and the first end of the first side screen is greater than or equal to the third preset value, the electronic device determines that the first touch area is located at the first end of the first side screen and the finger grip contact surface between.
  • the first side screen may be the side screen 1 shown in FIGS. 38A and 38B, the first touch area may be the touch area 1; the first end of the first side screen may be the top of the electronic device or Bottom; the third preset value can be L5; the first distance value can be distance 7.
  • the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is a tiger's mouth contact surface; referring to FIGS. 38A and 38C, when the finger touches When the distance between the grip contact surface and the first end of the first side screen is greater than or equal to the fourth preset value, the electronic device determines that the first touch area is located between the first end of the first side screen and the finger grip contact surface .
  • the first side screen may be the side screen 1
  • the first touch area may be the touch area 1.
  • the first side screen may be the side screen 2, and the first touch The area can be the touch area 2; the first end of the first side screen can be the top or bottom of the electronic device; the fourth preset value can be L6; the first distance value can be the distance 9.
  • the first preset condition, the second preset condition, the third preset condition, and the fourth preset condition can refer to the foregoing embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first contact surface is located on the back screen of the touch screen;
  • the electronic device determines that the first touch area of the first side screen is located between the top of the first side screen and the first side; the first side is adjacent to the first side On the screen, the distance between the first contact surface and the first side is the first distance value.
  • the first side screen may be the side screen 1, and the first touch area may be the touch area 1.
  • the first side screen may be the side screen 2.
  • a touch area may be touch area 2; the first end of the first side screen may be the top of the electronic device; the seventh preset value may be L3; the first distance value may be distance 5.
  • the electronic device displays a control box 201 on the side screen.
  • the electronic device determines the touch area of the side screen based on the touch information of the contact surface on the touch screen, and adjusts the display position of the control frame 201 within the touch area.
  • the touch area shown in FIG. 42 may be referred to as a first touch area, and the touch area shown in FIG. 42 may receive a user's second touch mode input of a control (for example, control 201A) of the control frame 201; electronic equipment In response to the second touch input, the first user interface triggered by the control 201A may be displayed.
  • the non-touch area shown in FIG. 42 can be referred to as the first non-touch area.
  • the electronic device receives the third touch input that acts on the non-touch area shown in FIG. 42, and the display content of the electronic device will not change. .
  • the side screen of the electronic device does not display controls, and the electronic device determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area of the side screen based on the first contact surface.
  • the electronic device can perform a function triggered by the second touch operation, for example, display the first user interface.
  • the electronic device does not perform the function corresponding to the third touch operation, and the display content of the electronic device does not change.
  • the first contact surface is located on the first side screen of the touch screen. Step S206 is also included before step S203.
  • the electronic device determines the second contact surface of the first touch input, and acquires touch information of the second contact surface, where the second contact surface is located on the first side screen.
  • Step S203 may specifically include: based on the touch information of the first contact surface and the touch information of the second contact surface, the electronic device determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area on the first side screen. The distance between a touch area and the second contact surface is the first distance value.
  • the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is finger grip contact surface.
  • the electronic device determines that the first touch area is located between the two finger grip contact surfaces.
  • the first side screen may be the side screen 1
  • the first touch area may be the touch area 1
  • the fifth preset value may be L7
  • the first distance value may be the distance 7.
  • the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is a tiger-mouth contact surface.
  • the electronic device determines that the first touch area is located between the contact surfaces of the two jaws.
  • the first side screen may be the side screen 2
  • the first touch area may be the touch area 2
  • the sixth preset value may be L8
  • the first distance value may be the distance 9.
  • the first contact surface is located on the first side screen of the touch screen. Step S207 is also included before step S203.
  • the electronic device determines a fifth contact surface of the first touch input, and acquires touch information of the fifth contact surface, where the fifth contact surface is located on the second side screen of the touch screen.
  • Step S203 may specifically include: the electronic device determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area on the first side screen based on the touch information of the first contact surface, and based on the touch information of the fifth contact surface , The second touch area and the second non-touch area are determined on the second side screen; the distance between the second touch area and the fifth contact surface is the second distance value, and the first touch area on the first side screen The area outside the control area is the first non-touch area, and the area outside the second touch area on the second side screen is the second non-touch area.
  • the electronic device determines the type of the first contact surface The thenar contact surface, and the fifth contact surface is the finger grip contact surface; referring to Figure 37A, when the distance between the thenar contact surface and the top of the first side screen is greater than or equal to the first preset value, the electronic The device determines that the first touch area is located between the top of the first side screen and the large thenar contact surface.
  • the electronic The device determines that the second touch area is located between the top of the second side screen and the finger grip contact surface.
  • the first side screen may be the side screen 1
  • the first touch area may be the touch area 1
  • the second side screen may be the side screen 2
  • the second touch area may be the touch area 2
  • the first preset value may be L1, and the second preset value may be L2
  • the first distance value may be distance 1, and distance 1 is equal to distance 2.
  • the electronic device determines that the types of the first contact surface and the fifth contact surface are both big fish. 40A, when the distance between the thenar contact surface 501 and the top of the first side screen is greater than or equal to the first preset value, the electronic device determines that the first touch area is located at the top of the first side screen Between the thenar contact surface and the thenar contact surface, when the distance between the thenar contact surface 502 and the top of the second side screen is greater than or equal to the first preset value, the electronic device determines that the second touch area is located on the second side screen Between the tip and the thenar contact surface.
  • the first side screen may be the side screen 1
  • the first touch area may be the touch area
  • the second side screen may be the side screen 2
  • the first distance value may be distance 1.
  • the electronic device determines the type of the first contact surface Finger grip contact surface, the type of the fifth contact surface is the tiger’s mouth contact surface; referring to Figure 37A, when the distance between the thenar contact surface and the top of the first side screen is greater than or equal to the third preset value, the electronic device determines The first touch area is located between the top of the first side screen and the thenar contact surface.
  • the electronic device determines The second touch area is located between the top of the second side screen and the finger grip contact surface.
  • the first side screen may be the side screen 1
  • the first touch area may be the touch area 1
  • the second side screen may be the side screen 2
  • the second touch area may be the touch area 2
  • the third preset value may be L5, and the fourth preset value may be L6
  • the first distance value may be distance 7, and distance 7 is equal to distance 9.
  • the first contact surface is located on the first side screen of the touch screen. Step S208 is also included before step S203.
  • the electronic device determines the sixth contact surface of the first touch input, and acquires touch information of the sixth contact surface, where the sixth i-contact surface is located on the second side screen of the touch screen.
  • Step S203 may specifically include: the electronic device determines the first touch area and the first non-touch area on the first side screen based on the touch information of the first contact surface, and based on the touch information of the sixth contact surface, Make sure that the second side screen is a non-touch area.
  • the electronic device determines the type of the first contact surface It is the thenar contact surface, and the type of the fifth contact surface is the finger grip contact surface.
  • the electronic device determines that the first touch area is located at the top of the first side screen and is in contact with the thenar between the surfaces, when the distance between the finger grasping contact surface and the top of the second side screen is less than the second preset value, the electronic device determines that the second side screen is a non-touch area.
  • the first side screen may be side screen 1, the first touch area may be touch area 1, and the second side screen may be side screen 2; the first preset value may be L1, and the second preset value may be L1.
  • the set value can be L2; the first distance value can be distance 1.
  • the electronic device determines that the types of the first contact surface and the fifth contact surface are both big fish. 40A, when the distance between the thenar contact surface 501 and the top of the first side screen is greater than or equal to the first preset value, the electronic device determines that the first touch area is located at the top of the first side screen Between the thenar contact surface and the thenar contact surface, when the distance between the thenar contact surface 502 and the top of the second side screen is less than the first preset value, the electronic device determines that the second side screen is a non-touch area.
  • the first side screen may be the side screen 1
  • the first touch area may be the touch area
  • the second side screen may be the side screen 2
  • the first distance value may be the distance 1.
  • the electronic device determines the type of the first contact surface Finger grip contact surface, the type of the fifth contact surface is the tiger’s mouth contact surface; referring to Figure 37A, when the distance between the thenar contact surface and the top of the first side screen is greater than or equal to the third preset value, the electronic device determines The first touch area is located between the top of the first side screen and the thenar contact surface. When the distance between the finger grasping contact surface and the top of the second side screen is less than the fourth preset value, the electronic device determines the first The two side screens are non-touch areas.
  • the first side screen may be side screen 1, the first touch area may be touch area 1, and the second side screen may be side screen 2; the third preset value may be L5, and the fourth preset value may be L5.
  • the setting value can be L6; the first distance value can be distance 7.
  • step 203 after step 203, the method further includes step S208 to step S211.
  • the electronic device receives a fourth touch input acting on the touch screen.
  • the electronic device determines the third contact surface of the fourth touch input, and acquires touch information of the third contact surface.
  • the electronic device determines that the first side screen on the touch screen is a non-touch area.
  • the electronic device receives the fifth touch input that acts on the first side screen; the electronic device responds to the fifth touch input, and the display content of the electronic device does not change.
  • the fifth touch input is a double-click operation.
  • the electronic device may display a volume adjustment frame for the fifth touch input acting on the side screen. After the electronic device determines that the side screen is a non-touch area based on the touch information of the third contact surface, the display content of the electronic device does not change for the fifth touch input acting on the side screen.
  • the fourth touch input may be a touch input when the user holds the electronic device.
  • the third contact surface may be the side contact surface formed by the user's hand and the side screen.
  • the third contact surface may also be the contact formed by the user's hand and the back screen. surface.
  • the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is a large thenar contact surface; referring to FIG. 37B, when the large thenar contact surface
  • the electronic device determines that the first side screen is a non-touch area.
  • the first side screen may be the side screen 1 shown; the first end of the first side screen may be the top of the electronic device; and the first preset value may be L1.
  • the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is a finger grip contact surface, and the first contact surface is a contact surface with the electronic device.
  • the electronic device determines that the first side screen is not Touch area.
  • the first side screen may be the side screen 2; the first end of the first side screen may be the top of the electronic device; and the second preset value may be L2.
  • the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is the finger grip contact surface; when the finger grip contact surface and the first contact surface When the distance between the first end of the side screen is less than the third preset value, the electronic device determines that the first side screen is a non-touch area.
  • the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is a tiger-mouth contact surface; when a finger grips the contact surface and the first side When the distance between the first end of the side screen is less than the fourth preset value, the electronic device determines that the first side screen is a non-touch area.
  • step S210 before step S210, the above method further includes step S212.
  • the electronic device determines a fourth contact surface of the fourth touch input, and acquires touch information of the fourth contact surface, where the fourth contact surface is located on the first side screen.
  • Step S210 may specifically include: based on the touch information of the third contact surface and the touch information of the fourth contact surface, the electronic device determines that the first side screen is a non-touch area.
  • the electronic device can determine that all the side screens are non-touch areas, which effectively reduces the risk of false touches.
  • the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is finger grip contact surface.
  • the electronic device determines that the first side screen is a non-touch area.
  • the first side screen may be the side screen 1; the fifth preset value may be L7.
  • the electronic device determines that the type of the first contact surface is a tiger-mouth contact surface.
  • the electronic device determines that the first side screen is a non-touch area.
  • the first side screen may be the side screen 2; the fifth preset value may be L8.
  • the hardware system may include a touch sensor 61, a display screen 62, a touch chip 63, a graphics processing unit (GPU) 64, and application processing. ⁇ (application processor, AP) 65.
  • the display screen 62 may be the display screen 194 in the foregoing embodiment
  • the touch sensor 61 may be the touch sensor 180K in the foregoing embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the touch sensor 61 can be used to detect the capacitance signal generated by the touch operation, and upload the capacitance signal generated by the user's touch operation to the touch chip 63. Specifically, referring to the related embodiment of FIG. 7B, the touch sensor 61 can detect the capacitance signal of the capacitance array, and send the capacitance signal of the above-mentioned capacitance array to the touch chip 63.
  • the touch chip 63 can determine the capacitance signal that satisfies the touch condition based on all the capacitance signals on the capacitance matrix detected by the touch sensor 61.
  • the touch condition may be that the signal strength of the capacitance value is greater than the threshold value 1.
  • the touch control chip 63 reports the capacitance signal that meets the touch condition and the coordinate point of the capacitance signal to the application processor 65.
  • the application processor 65 may call an anti-mistouch algorithm to determine the touch area and the non-touch area of the side screen. Then the application processor 65 performs event recognition and response based on the coordinate points in the touch area reported by the touch chip 63.
  • the touch chip 63 filters out the capacitance signals whose capacitance value signal strength is less than or equal to the threshold value 1, and reports the capacitance signal whose capacitance value signal strength is greater than the threshold value 1 to the application processor 65, which can avoid invalid interference signals.
  • the touch control chip 63 determines the capacitance signal that meets the touch condition and the coordinate point of the capacitance signal. Based on the above-mentioned coordinate points of the capacitance signal, the touch chip 63 can call an anti-mistouch algorithm to determine the touch area and the non-touch area of the side screen. The touch chip 63 reports the coordinate points located in the touch area to the application processor 65, and the application processor 65 performs event recognition and response based on the coordinate points reported by the touch chip 63.
  • the software system of the electronic device may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture.
  • the embodiment of the present application takes an Android system with a layered architecture as an example to exemplify the software structure of an electronic device.
  • FIG. 46 shows a software structure block diagram of an electronic device exemplarily provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device can determine the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen through the touch information of the contact surface where the user is holding the electronic device, thereby effectively reducing the risk of misoperation during the interaction between the user and the side screen. Improve the user experience.
  • the layered architecture divides the software into several layers, each with a clear role and division of labor. Communication between layers through software interface.
  • the Android system can be divided into an application framework layer, a hardware abstraction layer (HAL) layer, and a kernel layer (kernel) from top to bottom. among them:
  • the application layer includes a series of application packages, such as smart home, Bluetooth, WLAN and so on. It can also include applications such as camera, gallery, call, music, video, etc.
  • the application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for applications in the application layer.
  • the application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
  • Android Runtime includes core libraries and virtual machines. Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
  • the core library consists of two parts: one part is the function functions that the java language needs to call, and the other part is the core library of Android.
  • the application layer and application framework layer run in a virtual machine.
  • the virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and the application framework layer as binary files.
  • the virtual machine is used to perform functions such as object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection.
  • the kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software.
  • the core layer can include display drivers, sensor drivers, touch IC drivers, camera drivers, audio drivers, and so on.
  • the HAL layer and the kernel layer can perform corresponding operations in response to functions called by the application framework layer.
  • the touch sensor 61 when the touch sensor 61 receives a touch operation, a corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the touch chip, and the touch chip 63 sends the touch information 1 of the touch operation to the core layer touch chip driver.
  • the touch information 1 includes the coordinate points of the side contact surface of the electronic device held by the user.
  • the kernel layer sends touch information 1 to the touch screen process (TP Daemon) through path (1); TP Daemon calls touch screen algorithm 1 (TP Algorithm) through path (2) to obtain the characteristic information of touch information 1; TP Daemon passes Path (3) calls the anti-mistouch algorithm, and determines the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen based on the above characteristic information, and then determines the effective touch information 2 other than the non-touch area in the touch information 1; TP Daemon passes through the path (4) Send touch information 2 to the touch chip driver; the touch chip driver sends touch information 2 to the input system through path (5).
  • TP Daemon touch screen process
  • TP Algorithm touch screen algorithm 1
  • Path (3) calls the anti-mistouch algorithm, and determines the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen based on the above characteristic information, and then determines the effective touch information 2 other than the non-touch area in the touch information 1
  • TP Daemon passes through the path (4)
  • the application framework layer obtains the touch information 2 from the input system through the path (6), recognizes the application function corresponding to the touch information 2, and then starts the application function.
  • the touch information 2 corresponds to a double-click event in the touch area of the side screen
  • the application framework layer starts the display driver by calling the kernel layer
  • the volume adjustment frame 202 is displayed on the display screen 194.
  • TP Daemon invokes the anti-mistouch algorithm through the path (3), and when determining the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen based on the above characteristic information, the anti-mistouch algorithm passes the path (7) to the horizontal and vertical screen
  • the detection module obtains the horizontal and vertical screen status of the electronic device, and the anti-mistouch algorithm determines the touch area and non-touch area of the side screen based on the above feature information and the horizontal and vertical screen status of the electronic device, and then determines the non-touch area in the touch information 1 Other than valid touch information 2.
  • the various illustrative logic units and circuits described in the embodiments of this application can be implemented by general-purpose processors, digital information processors, application-specific integrated circuits (ASIC), field programmable gate arrays (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, Discrete gates or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination of the above are designed to implement or operate the described functions.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor.
  • the general-purpose processor may also be any traditional processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine.
  • the processor can also be implemented by a combination of computing devices, such as a digital information processor and a microprocessor, multiple microprocessors, one or more microprocessors combined with a digital information processor core, or any other similar configuration. achieve.
  • the steps of the method or algorithm described in the embodiments of the present application can be directly embedded in hardware, a software unit executed by a processor, or a combination of the two.
  • the software unit can be stored in RAM memory, flash memory, ROM memory, EPROM memory, EEPROM memory, registers, hard disk, removable disk, CD-ROM or any other storage medium in the art.
  • the storage medium may be connected to the processor, so that the processor can read information from the storage medium, and can store and write information to the storage medium.
  • the storage medium may also be integrated into the processor.
  • the processor and the storage medium may be set in the ASIC, and the ASIC may be set in the UE.
  • the processor and the storage medium may also be provided in different components in the UE.
  • the size of the sequence number of each process does not mean the order of execution.
  • the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not correspond to the difference in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the implementation process constitutes any limitation.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD)).
  • the technology in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented by means of software plus a necessary general hardware platform.
  • the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application can be embodied in the form of software products, which can be stored in a storage medium, such as ROM/RAM. , Magnetic disks, optical disks, etc., including a number of instructions to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute the methods described in the various embodiments or some parts of the embodiments of the present application.

Abstract

一种触控区域调整方法，所述触控区域调整方法包括：通过确认终端设备触摸显示屏中的感应参数变化的区域，从而进一步确定用户对于终端设备的抓握手势，再根据用户对于电子设备的抓握手势调整触摸显示屏触控响应区域的位置，从而避免用户对于终端设备屏幕的抓握手势带来的误触，进而提高用户的体验。

Description

一种触控区域调整方法及装置
本申请要求于2019年12月9日提交中国专利局、申请号为201911251873.9、申请名称为“一种触控区域调整方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，以及2020年09月17日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010982063.7、申请名称为“一种触控区域调整方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及电子设备技术领域，具体涉及一种触控区域调整方法及装置。
背景技术
为了解决现有技术中，用户在抓握电子设备时，会误触到扩展的触控区域的问题，本申请实施例公开一种触控区域调整方法及装置。
第一方面，本申请提供了一种触控区域调整方法，包括：获取终端设备触控显示屏上感应参数发生变化的第一区域；根据第一区域在终端设备触控显示屏中的位置，确定终端设备被抓握的手势；根据终端设备被抓握的手势，调整终端设备触控显示屏中的触控区域的位置，以使触控区域远离第一区域。上述方法可以有效的实现用户对于终端设备的误触，提高用户的体验度。
其中，在第一方面的一种可能实现的方式中，感应参数包括：压力参数、温度参数、电容参数等。通过不同的参数来实现防误触，可以增强防误触的精准度，提高用户的体验度。
其中，在第一方面的另一种可能实现的方式中，根据第一区域在终端设备触控显示屏中的位置，确定终端设备被抓握的手势之前还包括计算第一区域内感应参数的变化量，其中感应参数的变化量大于第一阈值的第一区域为第一目标区域。通过计算第一区域内感应参数的变化量，可以实现更加精准的防误触，提高用户体验度。
第二方面，本申请提供了一种终端设备，包括：存储器、处理器及存储在存储器上并可在处理器上运行的计算机程序，处理器执行计算机程序时，执行以下步骤：获取终端设备触控显示屏上感应参数发生变化的第一区域；根据第一区域在终端设备触控显示屏中的位置，确定终端设备被抓握的手势；根据终端设备被抓握的手势，调整终端设备触控显示屏中的触控区域的位置，以使触控区域远离第一区域。上述方法和步骤可以有效的实现用户对于终端设备的误触，提高用户的体验度。
其中，在第二方面的一种可能实现的方式中，感应参数包括：压力参数、温度参数、电容参数等。通过不同的参数来实现防误触，可以增强防误触的精准度，提高用户的体验度。
其中，在第二方面的另一种可能实现的方式中，根据第一区域在终端设备触控显示屏中的位置，确定终端设备被抓握的手势之前还包括计算第一区域内感应参数的变化量，其中感应参数的变化量大于第一阈值的第一区域为第一目标区域。通过计算第一区域内感应参数的变化量，可以实现更加精准的防误触，提高用户体验度。
第三方面，本申请提供了一种触控区域调整方法，所述方法包括：电子设备接收作用 于电子设备的触控屏上的第一触摸输入；电子设备确定第一触摸输入的第一接触面，并获取第一接触面的触控信息，触控信息包括电容信息；基于第一接触面的触控信息，电子设备在电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域；其中，第一触控区域与第一接触面的距离为第一距离值，第一非触控区域包括第一接触面；电子设备接收作用于第一触控区域的第二触模输入；电子设备响应于第二触模输入，显示第一用户界面；电子设备接收作用于第一非触控区域的第三触模输入；电子设备响应于第三触模输入，电子设备的显示内容未发生变化。
本申请实施例中，第一触摸输入可以包括用户握持移动终端的触摸输入，电子设备可以确定第一触摸输入的接触面，并获取该接触面的触控信息；电子设备可以基于该接触面的触控信息，自适应的调整触控屏的触控区域和非触控区域，并使触控区域远离上述接触面。其中，电子设备可以响应于针对触控区域的第二触摸输入，执行该触摸操作对应的功能，例如，显示第一用户界面；电子设备可以响应于针对非触控区域的第三触摸输入，不执行该触摸操作对应的功能，即不改变电子设备的显示内容。这样，通过自适应调整触控区域的位置，有效降低了误触风险，提升了用户体验。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第一接触面位于触控屏的第一侧边屏幕，基于第一接触面的触控信息，上述电子设备在电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，包括：基于第一接触面的触控信息，电子设备在第一侧边屏幕上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域；触控信息还可以包括接触面的高度、接触面的宽度、接触面的面积中的一或多项，第一侧边屏幕中第一触控区域之外的区域为第一非触控区域。这样，基于位于一个侧边屏幕的至少一个接触面的触控信息，电子设备可以确定该侧边屏幕上的触控区域。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第一接触面位于触控屏的第一侧边屏幕，基于第一接触面的触控信息，上述电子设备在电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域之前，还包括：电子设备确定第一触摸输入的第二接触面，并获取第二接触面的触控信息，第二接触面位于第一侧边屏幕；基于第一接触面的触控信息，上述电子设备在电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，包括：基于第一接触面的触控信息和第二接触面的触控信息，电子设备在第一侧边屏幕上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，第一触控区域与第二接触面的距离为第一距离值；触控信息还可以包括接触面的高度、接触面的宽度、接触面的面积中的一或多项，第一侧边屏幕中第一触控区域之外的区域为第一非触控区域。这样，基于位于一个侧边屏幕的两个接触面的触控信息，电子设备可以确定该侧边屏幕上的触控区域，且该触控区域与两个接触面的距离均为第一距离值。从而有效降低了误触风险，提升了用户体验。
在一种可能的实现方式中，基于第一接触面的触控信息，上述电子设备在电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域之后，方法还包括：电子设备接收作用于触控屏上的第四触摸输入；电子设备确定第四触摸输入的第三接触面，并获取第三接触面的触控信息；第三接触面位于触控屏上的第一侧边屏幕；触控信息还可以包括接触面的高度、接触面的宽度、接触面的面积中的一或多项；基于第三接触面的触控信息，电子设备确定触控屏上的第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域；电子设备接收作用于第一侧边屏幕的第五触模输入；电子设备响应于第五触模输入，电子设备的显示内容未发生变化。这样，基于位 于一个侧边屏幕的至少一个接触面的触控信息，电子设备可以确定该侧边屏幕为非触控区域，有效降低了误触风险。
在一种可能的实现方式中，基于第三接触面的触控信息，上述电子设备确定触控屏上的第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域之前，还包括：电子设备确定第四触摸输入的第四接触面，并获取第四接触面的触控信息，第四接触面位于第一侧边屏幕；上述基于第三接触面的触控信息，电子设备确定触控屏上的第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域，包括：基于第三接触面的触控信息和第四接触面的触控信息，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域。这样，基于位于一个侧边屏幕的两个接触面的触控信息，电子设备可以确定该侧边屏幕全部为非触控区域，有效降低了误触风险。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第一接触面位于触控屏的第一侧边屏幕，基于第一接触面的触控信息，上述电子设备在电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域之前，还包括：电子设备确定第一触摸输入的第五接触面，并获取第五接触面的触控信息，第五接触面位于触控屏的第二侧边屏幕；基于第一接触面的触控信息，上述电子设备在电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，包括：电子设备基于第一接触面的触控信息，在第一侧边屏幕上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，并基于第五接触面的触控信息，在第二侧边屏幕上确定出第二触控区域和第二非触控区域；第二触控区域与第五接触面的距离为第二距离值，第一侧边屏幕中第一触控区域之外的区域为第一非触控区域，第二侧边屏幕中第二触控区域之外的区域为第二非触控区域。这样，基于位于第一侧边屏幕的至少一个接触面的触控信息，以及位于第二侧边屏幕的至少一个接触面的触控信息，电子设备确定两个侧边屏幕均包括触控区域。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第一接触面位于触控屏的第一侧边屏幕，基于第一接触面的触控信息，上述电子设备在电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域之前，还包括：电子设备确定第一触摸输入的第六接触面，并获取第六接触面的触控信息，第六接触面位于触控屏的第二侧边屏幕；基于第一接触面的触控信息，电子设备在电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，包括：电子设备基于第一接触面的触控信息，在第一侧边屏幕上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，并基于第六接触面的触控信息，确定第二侧边屏幕为非触控区域；第一侧边屏幕中第一触控区域之外的区域为第一非触控区域。这样，基于位于第一侧边屏幕的至少一个接触面的触控信息，以及位于第二侧边屏幕的至少一个接触面的触控信息，电子设备确定一个侧边屏幕包括触控区域，另一个侧边屏幕全部为非触控区域。
在一种可能的实现方式中，基于第一接触面的触控信息，上述电子设备在第一侧边屏幕上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，包括：当第一接触面的触控信息满足第一预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为大鱼际接触面；当第一接触面与第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离大于等于第一预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于第一侧边屏幕的第一端和第一接触面之间；第一预设条件为接触面的高度大于第一高度阈值，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第一比值范围内；或者，第一预设条件为接触面的高度大于第一高度阈值，接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值大于第一高度比值，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容 值的比值在第一比值范围内；或者，第一预设条件为接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值大于第一高度比值，接触面的面积大于第一面积阈值，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第一比值范围内；其中，第一比值范围内的取值大于等于1，接触面的最边缘坐标列为触控屏上接触面对应的触控屏阵列中最接近电子设备的长边的坐标列；接触面的次边缘坐标列为触控屏上接触面对应的触控屏阵列中最接近电子设备的长边的第二列坐标列。
在一种可能的实现方式中，基于第一接触面的触控信息，上述电子设备在第一侧边屏幕上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，包括：当第一接触面的触控信息满足第二预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为手指抓握接触面；当第一接触面与第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离大于等于第二预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于第一侧边屏幕的第一端和第一接触面之间；第一接触面为与第一侧边屏幕的第一端最近的手指抓握接触面；第二预设条件为接触面的高度在第一高度范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第二比值范围内；或者，第二预设条件为接触面的高度在第一高度范围内，接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在第三比值范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第二比值范围内；或者，第二预设条件为接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在第三比值范围内，接触面的面积在第一面积范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第二比值范围内；其中，第一高度范围内的取值小于等于第一高度阈值，第二比值范围内的取值大于等于1，第二比值范围内的取值大于等于第一比值范围内的取值，第三比值范围内的取值小于等于第一高度比值，第一面积范围内的取值小于等于第一面积阈值。
在一种可能的实现方式中，基于第一接触面的触控信息，上述电子设备在第一侧边屏幕上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，包括：当第一接触面的触控信息满足第三预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为手指搭握接触面；当第一接触面与第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离大于等于第三预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于第一侧边屏幕的第一端和第一接触面之间；三预设条件为接触面的高度在第二高度范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第四比值范围内；或者，第三预设条件为接触面的高度大于第二高度范围，接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在第五比值范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第四比值范围内；或者，第三预设条件为接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在第五比值范围内，接触面的面积在第二面积范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第四比值范围内；其中，第二高度范围内的取值小于等于第一高度阈值，第四比值范围内的取值小于等于1，第五比值范围内的取值小于等于第三比值范围内的取值，第二面积范围内的取值小于等于第一面积阈值。
在一种可能的实现方式中，基于第一接触面的触控信息，上述电子设备在第一侧边屏幕上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，包括：当第一接触面的触控信息满足第四预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为虎口接触面；当第一接触面与第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离大于等于第四预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于第一侧边屏幕的 第一端和第一接触面之间；第四预设条件为接触面的高度在第三高度范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第六比值范围内；或者，第四预设条件为接触面的高度大于第三高度范围，接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在第七比值范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第六比值范围内；或者，第四预设条件为接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在第七比值范围内，接触面的面积在第三面积范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第六比值范围内；其中，第三高度范围内的取值小于等于第一高度阈值，第三高度范围内的取值大于等于第二高度范围内的取值，第六比值范围内的取值大于等于1，第六比值范围内的取值小于等于第二比值范围内的取值，第七比值范围内的取值小于等于第一高度比值，第七比值范围内的取值大于等于第五比值范围内的取值，第三面积范围内的取值小于等于第一面积阈值。
在一种可能的实现方式中，基于第一接触面的触控信息，上述电子设备在电子设备的第一侧边屏幕上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，包括：当第一接触面的触控信息和第二接触面的触控信息均满足第三预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为手指搭握接触面；当第一接触面与第二接触面的距离大于等于第五预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于第一接触面和第二接触面之间。
在一种可能的实现方式中，基于第一接触面的触控信息，上述电子设备在电子设备的第一侧边屏幕上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，包括：当第一接触面的触控信息和第二接触面的触控信息均满足第四预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为虎口接触面；当第一接触面与第二接触面的距离大于等于第六预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于第一接触面和第二接触面之间。
在一种实现方式中，第四预设条件中第六比值范围内的取值大于等于1，第三高度范围内的取值大于等于第二高度范围内的取值，第七比值范围内的取值大于等于第五比值范围内的取值，第三面积范围内的取值大于等于第二面积范围内的取值。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第三接触面位于触控屏的第一侧边屏幕；上述基于第三接触面的触控信息，电子设备确定触控屏上的第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域，包括：当第三接触面的触控信息满足第一预设条件，且第三接触面与第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离小于第一预设值时，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第三接触面位于触控屏的第一侧边屏幕；上述基于第三接触面的触控信息，电子设备确定触控屏上的第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域，包括：当第三接触面的触控信息满足第二预设条件，且第三接触面与第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离小于第二预设值时，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第三接触面位于触控屏的第一侧边屏幕；上述基于第三接触面的触控信息，电子设备确定触控屏上的第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域，包括：当第三接触面的触控信息满足第三预设条件，且第三接触面与第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离小于第三预设值时，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第三接触面位于触控屏的第一侧边屏幕；上述基于第三接触面的触控信息，电子设备确定触控屏上的第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域，包括：当第三接 触面的触控信息满足第四预设条件，且第三接触面与第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离小于第四预设值时，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述基于第三接触面的触控信息和第四接触面的触控信息，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域，包括：当第三接触面的触控信息和第四接触面的触控信息均满足第三预设条件，且第三接触面和第四接触面的距离小于第五预设值时，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述基于第三接触面的触控信息和第四接触面的触控信息，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域，包括：当第三接触面的触控信息和第四接触面的触控信息均满足第四预设条件，且第三接触面和第四接触面的距离小于第六预设值时，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述基于第三接触面的触控信息和第四接触面的触控信息，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域，包括：当第三接触面的触控信息和第四接触面的触控信息均满足第四预设条件时，电子设备确定第三接触面和第四接触面均均为虎口接触面，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第一接触面位于电子设备的背面屏幕；上述基于第一接触面的触控信息，电子设备在电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，包括：当第一接触面的第一边与触控屏的第一侧边屏幕的顶端的距离大于等于第七预设值时，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕的第一触控区域位于第一侧边屏幕的顶端和第一侧边之间；第一边相邻于第一侧边屏幕，第一接触面与第一边的距离为第一距离值。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述基于第一接触面的触控信息，电子设备在电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，包括：基于第一接触面的触控信息，电子设备确定用户的握持状态，并基于用户的握持状态，在第一侧边屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域；用户的握持状态包括左手纵向握持、右手纵向握持、双手纵向握持、左手横向握持、右手横向握持和双手横向握持。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第一侧边屏幕的第一端为第一侧边屏幕的顶端；或者，第一侧边屏幕的第一端为第一侧边屏幕的顶端或第一侧边屏幕的底端。
第四方面，本申请提供了一种电子设备，包括触控屏，存储器，一个或多个处理器，以及一个或多个程序；其中，所述一个或多个程序被存储在所述存储器中；其特征在于，所述一个或多个处理器在执行所述一个或多个程序时，使得电子设备执行上述第三方面任一项可能的实现方式中的触控区域调整方法。
第五方面，本申请提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如第一方面和第三方面的任一项所述的方法和步骤。
本申请实施例公开的触控区域调整方法，能够确定终端设备触摸显示屏中感应参数发生变化的第一区域，并根据第一区域的位置，确定电子设备被抓握的手势，再根据该手势调整触控区域在终端设备触摸显示屏中的位置，从而使调整后的触控区域远离第一区域，从而避免触控区域被误触，提高用户的使用体验。
附图说明
图1为本申请实施例公开的一种电子设备的结构示意图；
图2A为本申请实施例公开的一种应用环幕屏的电子设备的正视图；
图2B为本申请实施例公开的一种应用环幕屏的电子设备的侧视图；
图3为本申请实施例公开的一种应用环绕屏的电子设备的立体图；
图4A为本申请实施例公开的一种应用折叠屏屏的电子设备的示意图；
图4B为本申请实施例公开的又一种应用折叠屏屏的电子设备的示意图；
图4C为本申请实施例公开的又一种应用折叠屏屏的电子设备的示意图；
图5A和图5B为本申请实施例公开的另一种应用环幕屏的电子设备示意图；
图6A和图6B为本申请实施例公开的另一种应用环绕屏的电子设备示意图；
图7A至图7C为本申请实施例公开的另一种应用折叠屏屏的电子设备的示意图；
图8A为本申请实施例公开的屏幕的结构示意图；
图8B为本申请实施例公开的触摸传感器的结构示意图；
图9为本申请实施例公开的一种触控区域调整方法的工作流程示意图；
图10A为本申请实施例公开的又一种触控区域调整方法的工作流程示意图；
图10B为本申请实施例公开的一种第一区域示意图；
图11A为本申请实施例公开的又一种触控区域调整方法的工作流程示意图；
图11B为本申请实施例公开的另一种第一区域示意图；
图11C为本申请实施例公开的另一种第一区域示意图；
图12为本申请实施例公开的又一种触控区域调整方法的工作流程示意图；
图13为本申请实施例公开的一种电子设备的第一区域示意图；
图14为本申请实施例公开的第一单手抓握手势的示意图；
图15为本申请实施例公开的又一种触控区域调整方法的工作流程示意图；
图16为本申请实施例公开的又一种电子设备的第一区域示意图；
图17为本申请实施例公开的第二单手抓握手势的示意图；
图18为本申请实施例公开的又一种触控区域调整方法的工作流程示意图；
图19为本申请实施例公开的又一种电子设备的第一区域示意图；
图20为本申请实施例公开的横屏抓握手势的示意图；
图21为本申请实施例公开的又一种触控区域调整方法的工作流程示意图；
图22为本申请实施例公开的又一种电子设备的第一区域示意图；
图23为本申请实施例公开的第三单手抓握手势的示意图；
图24为本申请实施例公开的又一种触控区域调整方法的工作流程示意图；
图25为本申请实施例公开的又一种电子设备的第一区域示意图；
图26为本申请实施例公开的又一种电子设备的第一区域示意图；
图27为本申请实施例公开的第四单手抓握手势的示意图；
图28为本申请实施例公开的第五单手抓握手势的示意图；
图29为本申请实施例公开的侧边屏幕的显示内容示意图；
图30A至图30D为本申请实施例公开的侧边屏幕的信息交互示意图；
图31A至图31C为本申请实施例公开的左手纵向握持的示意图；
图32A至图32C为本申请实施例公开的右手纵向握持的示意图；
图33A至图33B为本申请实施例公开的双手纵向握持的示意图；
图34A至图34D为本申请实施例公开的左手横向握持的示意图；
图35A至图35D为本申请实施例公开的右手横向握持的示意图；
图36A至图36D为本申请实施例公开的双手横向握持的示意图；
图37A至图37D为本申请实施例公开的触控区域和非触控区域的示意图；
图38A至图38C为本申请实施例公开的触控区域和非触控区域的示意图；
图39A至图39G为本申请实施例公开的触控区域和非触控区域的示意图；
图40A至图40D为本申请实施例公开的触控区域和非触控区域的示意图；
图41A至图41F为本申请实施例公开的触控区域和非触控区域的示意图；
图42为本申请实施例公开的一种侧边屏幕的显示内容示意图；
图43为本申请实施例公开的另一种触控区域调整方法的工作流程示意图；
图44为本申请实施例公开的一种接触面的电容信号示意图；
图45为本申请实施例公开的一种硬件系统示意图；
图46为本申请实施例公开的一种软件系统示意图。
具体实施方式
本申请说明书和权利要求书及附图说明中的术语“第一”、“第二”和“第三”等是用于区别不同对象，而不是用于限定特定顺序，其中第一或者第二还可以包括更多的步骤，不仅限于一个步骤或者特征。
在本申请实施例中，“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请实施例中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言，使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念。
为了解决现有技术中，用户在抓握电子设备时，会误触到触控区域的问题，本申请实施例公开一种触控区域调整方法及装置。
其中，本申请各个实施例公开的触控区域调整方法可应用于多种类型的电子设备。示例性的，该电子设备可以是手机、平板电脑、手持计算机、上网本、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant，PDA)、可穿戴电子设备和智能手表等设备，当然，电子设备还可为其他类型，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
在本申请的实施例中，电子设备的结构可以如图1所示，其中，图1为应用本申请实施例公开的触控区域调整方法的电子设备的结构示意图。
如图1所示，电子设备可以包括处理器110，外部存储器接口120，内部存储器121，通用串行总线(universal serial bus，USB)接口130，充电管理模块140，电源管理模块141，电池142，传感器模块180，按键190，马达191，指示器192，摄像头193，显示屏194等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A，陀螺仪传感器180B，气压传感器180C， 磁传感器180D，加速度传感器180E，距离传感器180F，接近光传感器180G，指纹传感器180H，温度传感器180J，触摸传感器180K，环境光传感器180L，骨传导传感器180M等。进一步的，当所述电子设备为手机时，所述电子设备还可以包括：天线1，天线2，移动通信模块150，无线通信模块160，音频模块170，扬声器170A，受话器170B，麦克风170C，耳机接口170D，以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module，SIM)卡接口195等。
可以理解的是，本实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备的具体限定。在另一些实施例中，电子设备可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者拆分某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件，软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元，例如：处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor，AP)，调制解调处理器，图形处理器(graphics processing unit，GPU)，图像信号处理器(image signal processor，ISP)，控制器，视频编解码器，数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)，基带处理器，和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit，NPU)等。其中，不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件，也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。
其中，控制器可以是电子设备的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号，产生操作控制信号，完成取指令和执行指令的控制。
处理器110中还可以设置存储器，用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中，处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据，可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取，减少了处理器110的等待时间，因而提高了系统的效率。
在本申请的一些实施例中，处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit，I2C)接口，集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound，I2S)接口，脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation，PCM)接口，通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter，UART)接口，移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface，MIPI)，通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output，GPIO)接口，用户标识模块(subscriber identity module，SIM)接口，和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus，USB)接口等。
I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线，包括一根串行数据线(serial data line，SDA)和一根串行时钟线(derail clock line，SCL)。在一些实施例中，处理器110可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器110可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器180K，充电器，闪光灯，摄像头193等。例如：处理器110可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器180K，使处理器110与触摸传感器180K通过I2C总线接口通信，实现电子设备的触摸功能。
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。在一些实施例中，处理器110可以包含多组I2S总线。处理器110可以通过I2S总线与音频模块170耦合，实现处理器110与音频模块170之间的通信。在一些实施例中，音频模块170可以通过I2S接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号，实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。
PCM接口也可以用于音频通信，将模拟信号抽样，量化和编码。在一些实施例中，音频模块170与无线通信模块160可以通过PCM总线接口耦合。在一些实施例中，音频模块 170也可以通过PCM接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号，实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。所述I2S接口和所述PCM接口都可以用于音频通信。
UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线，用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。在一些实施例中，UART接口通常被用于连接处理器110与无线通信模块160。例如：处理器110通过UART接口与无线通信模块160中的蓝牙模块通信，实现蓝牙功能。在一些实施例中，音频模块170可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号，实现通过蓝牙耳机播放音乐的功能。
MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器110与显示屏194，摄像头193等外围器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serial interface，CSI)，显示屏串行接口(display serial interface，DSI)等。在一些实施例中，处理器110和摄像头193通过CSI接口通信，实现电子设备的拍摄功能。处理器110和显示屏194通过DSI接口通信，实现电子设备的显示功能。
GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。GPIO接口可以被配置为控制信号，也可被配置为数据信号。在一些实施例中，GPIO接口可以用于连接处理器110与摄像头193，显示屏194，无线通信模块160，音频模块170，传感器模块180等。GPIO接口还可以被配置为I2C接口，I2S接口，UART接口，MIPI接口等。
USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口，具体可以是Mini USB接口，Micro USB接口，USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为电子设备充电，也可以用于电子设备与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机，通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他电子设备，例如AR设备等。
可以理解的是，本实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系，只是示意性说明，并不构成对电子设备的结构限定。在本申请另一些实施例中，电子设备也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式，或多种接口连接方式的组合。
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中，充电器可以是无线充电器，也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中，充电管理模块140可以通过USB接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中，充电管理模块140可以通过电子设备的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时，还可以通过电源管理模块141为电子设备供电。
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142，充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入，为处理器110，内部存储器121，显示屏194，摄像头193，和无线通信模块160等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量，电池循环次数，电池健康状态(漏电，阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中，电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中，电源管理模块141和充电管理模块140也可以设置于同一个器件中。
电子设备的无线通信功能可以通过天线1，天线2，移动通信模块150，无线通信模块160，调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用，以提高天线的利用率。例如：可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中，天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器，开关，功率放大器，低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier，LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波，并对接收的电磁波进行滤波，放大等处理，传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大，经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中，移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中，移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中，调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后，被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器170A，受话器170B等)输出声音信号，或通过显示屏194显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中，调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中，调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器110，与移动通信模块150或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity，Wi-Fi)网络)，蓝牙(bluetooth，BT)，全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system，GNSS)，调频(frequency modulation，FM)，近距离无线通信技术(near field communication，NFC)，红外技术(infrared，IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波，将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理，将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号，对其进行调频，放大，经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。
在一些实施例中，电子设备的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合，天线2和无线通信模块160耦合，使得电子设备可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications，GSM)，通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service，GPRS)，码分多址接入(code division multiple access，CDMA)，宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access，WCDMA)，时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access，TD-SCDMA)，长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)，BT，GNSS，WLAN，NFC，FM，和/或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位系统(global positioning system，GPS)，全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system，GLONASS)，北斗卫星导航系统(beidou navigation satellite system，BDS)，准天顶卫星系统(quasi-zenith satellite system，QZSS)和/或星基增强系统(satellite based augmentation systems，SBAS)。
电子设备通过GPU，显示屏194，以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器，连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算，用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU，其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。
显示屏194用于显示图像，视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液 晶显示屏(liquid crystal display，LCD)，有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode，OLED)，有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode的，AMOLED)，柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode，FLED)，Miniled，MicroLed，Micro-oled，量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes，QLED)等。在一些实施例中，电子设备可以包括1个或N个显示屏194，N为大于1的正整数。
电子设备的显示屏194上可以显示一系列图形用户界面(graphical user interface，GUI)，这些GUI都是该电子设备的主屏幕。一般来说，电子设备的显示屏194的尺寸是固定的，只能在该电子设备的显示屏194中显示有限的控件。控件是一种GUI元素，它是一种软件组件，包含在应用程序中，控制着该应用程序处理的所有数据以及关于这些数据的交互操作，用户可以通过直接操作(direct manipulation)来与控件交互，从而对应用程序的有关信息进行读取或者编辑。一般而言，控件可以包括图标、按钮、菜单、选项卡、文本框、对话框、状态栏、导航栏、Widget等可视的界面元素。例如，在本申请实施例中，显示屏194可以显示虚拟按键。
电子设备可以通过ISP，摄像头193，视频编解码器，GPU，显示屏194以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。
ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。例如，拍照时，打开快门，光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上，光信号转换为电信号，摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理，转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点，亮度，肤色进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光，色温等参数优化。在一些实施例中，ISP可以设置在摄像头193中。
摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device，CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor，CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号，之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB，YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中，电子设备可以包括1个或N个摄像头193，N为大于1的正整数。
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号，除了可以处理数字图像信号，还可以处理其他数字信号。例如，当电子设备在频点选择时，数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样，电子设备可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频，例如：动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group，MPEG)1，MPEG2，MPEG3，MPEG4等。
NPU为神经网络(neural-network，NN)计算处理器，通过借鉴生物神经网络结构，例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式，对输入信息快速处理，还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现电子设备的智能认知等应用，例如：图像识别，人脸识别，语音识别，文本理解等。
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡，例如Micro SD卡，实现扩展电子设备的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信，实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐，视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。
内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码，所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令，从而执行电子设备的各种功能应用以及数据处理。例如，在本实施例中，处理器110可以通过执行存储在内部存储器121中的指令，通过本申请实施例公开的方案实现操控区域的调整。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中，存储程序区可存储操作系统，至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能，图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据，电话本等)等。此外，内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器，还可以包括非易失性存储器，例如至少一个磁盘存储器件，闪存器件，通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage，UFS)等。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令，和/或存储在设置于处理器中的存储器的指令，执行电子设备的各种功能应用以及数据处理。
电子设备可以通过音频模块170，扬声器170A，受话器170B，麦克风170C，耳机接口170D，以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放，录音等。
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出，也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块170还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中，音频模块170可以设置于处理器110中，或将音频模块170的部分功能模块设置于处理器110中。
扬声器170A，也称“喇叭”，用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。电子设备可以通过扬声器170A收听音乐，或收听免提通话。
受话器170B，也称“听筒”，用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当电子设备接听电话或语音信息时，可以通过将受话器170B靠近人耳接听语音。
麦克风170C，也称“话筒”，“传声器”，用于将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息时，用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风170C发声，将声音信号输入到麦克风170C。电子设备可以设置至少一个麦克风170C。在另一些实施例中，电子设备可以设置两个麦克风170C，除了采集声音信号，还可以实现降噪功能。在另一些实施例中，电子设备还可以设置三个，四个或更多麦克风170C，实现采集声音信号，降噪，还可以识别声音来源，实现定向录音功能等。
耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口170D可以是USB接口130，也可以是3.5mm的开放电子设备平台(open mobile terminal platform，OMTP)标准接口，美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA，CTIA)标准接口。
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号，可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中，压力传感器180A可以设置于显示屏194。压力传感器180A的种类很多，如电阻式压力传感器，电感式压力传感器，电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器180A，电极之间的电容改变。电子设备根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏194，电子设备根据压力传感器180A检测所述触摸操作强度。电子设备也可以根据压力传感器180A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中，作用于相同触摸位置，但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作，可以对应不同的操作指令。例如：当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时，执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力 阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时，执行新建短消息的指令。
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备的运动姿态。在一些实施例中，可以通过陀螺仪传感器180B确定电子设备围绕三个轴(即，x，y和z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性的，当按下快门，陀螺仪传感器180B检测电子设备抖动的角度，根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离，让镜头通过反向运动抵消电子设备的抖动，实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器180B还可以用于导航，体感游戏场景。
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中，电子设备通过气压传感器180C测得的气压值计算海拔高度，辅助定位和导航。
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。电子设备可以利用磁传感器180D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些实施例中，当电子设备是翻盖机时，电子设备可以根据磁传感器180D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态，设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。
加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态，应用于横竖屏切换，计步器等应用。
距离传感器180F，用于测量距离。电子设备可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中，拍摄场景，电子设备可以利用距离传感器180F测距以实现快速对焦。
接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器，例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。电子设备通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。电子设备使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时，可以确定电子设备附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时，电子设备可以确定电子设备附近没有物体。电子设备可以利用接近光传感器180G检测用户手持电子设备贴近耳朵通话，以便自动熄灭屏幕达到省电的目的。接近光传感器180G也可用于皮套模式，口袋模式自动解锁与锁屏。
环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。电子设备可以根据感知的环境光亮度自适应调节显示屏194亮度。环境光传感器180L也可用于拍照时自动调节白平衡。环境光传感器180L还可以与接近光传感器180G配合，检测电子设备是否在口袋里，以防误触。
指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。电子设备可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁，访问应用锁，指纹拍照，指纹接听来电等。
温度传感器180J用于检测温度。在一些实施例中，电子设备利用温度传感器180J检测的温度，执行温度处理策略。例如，当温度传感器180J上报的温度超过阈值，电子设备执行降低位于温度传感器180J附近的处理器的性能，以便降低功耗实施热保护。在另一些实施例中，当温度低于另一阈值时，电子设备对电池142加热，以避免低温导致电子设备异常关机。在其他一些实施例中，当温度低于又一阈值时，电子设备对电池142的输出电压执行升压，以避免低温导致的异常关机。
触摸传感器180K，也称“触控器件”。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194，由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏，也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器，以确 定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中，触摸传感器180K也可以设置于电子设备的表面，与显示屏194所处的位置不同。
骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。在一些实施例中，骨传导传感器180M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器180M也可以接触人体脉搏，接收血压跳动信号。在一些实施例中，骨传导传感器180M也可以设置于耳机中，结合成骨传导耳机。音频模块170可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的声部振动骨块的振动信号，解析出语音信号，实现语音功能。应用处理器可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的血压跳动信号解析心率信息，实现心率检测功能。
按键190包括开机键，音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。电子设备可以接收按键输入，产生与电子设备的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。
马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示，也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如，作用于不同应用(例如拍照，音频播放等)的触摸操作，可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏194不同区域的触摸操作，马达191也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如：时间提醒，接收信息，闹钟，游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。
指示器192可以是指示灯，可以用于指示充电状态，电量变化，也可以用于指示消息，未接来电，通知等。
SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口195，或从SIM卡接口195拔出，实现和电子设备的接触和分离。电子设备可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口，N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口195可以支持Nano SIM卡，Micro SIM卡，SIM卡等。同一个SIM卡接口195可以同时插入多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同，也可以不同。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容外部存储卡。电子设备通过SIM卡和网络交互，实现通话以及数据通信等功能。在一些实施例中，电子设备采用eSIM，即：嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在电子设备中，不能和电子设备分离。
另外，在上述部件之上，运行有操作系统。例如苹果公司所开发的iOS操作系统，谷歌公司所开发的Android操作系统，微软公司所开发的Windows操作系统等。在该操作系统上可以安装运行应用程序。
其中，本申请实施例所涉及的电子设备，可安装有iOS操作系统、Android操作系统或Windows操作系统，或者，所述电子设备也可安装有其他操作系统，本申请实施例对此不作限定。
需要说明的，本申请实施例中提及的顶端、底端、左端、右端，以及上方、下方均是相对的，是具体实现方式中的示例性地描述，不应对本申请实施例构成限定。
另外，在本申请实施例中，显示屏194中通常包括触控区域，这种情况下，当显示屏194中显示某一图标，并接收到针对该图标的触控时，电子设备可执行该图标对应的操作。
进一步的，为了提高电子设备的屏幕的利用率，目前部分电子设备还支持100％的全面屏，即除了电子设备的显示屏幕之外，还支持为其他区域扩展一些特定功能，这种情况下，所述其他区域中设置有触控区域。当需要电子设备执行所述特定功能时，用户会触控位于 所述其他区域的触控区域，从而使电子设备执行相应的操作。因此，在电子设备的体积不变的情况下，通过对所述其他区域中的触控区域的触控，能够使电子设备实现所述特定功能，从而提高对电子设备的其他区域的利用率。
其中，应用本申请实施例公开的方法的电子设备还可应用多种类型的屏幕，相应的，除了电子设备的显示屏幕之外，扩展有特定功能的其他区域也可为多种类型。在本申请实施例中，可将电子设备的显示屏幕称为第一屏幕，扩展有特定功能的其他区域为第二屏幕，并且，在所述第二屏幕中，设置有触控区域。当接收到针对第二屏幕的触控区域的触控时，电子设备可执行所述特定功能。
例如，当第二屏幕扩展的特定功能为亮度调节时，当需要调整电子设备显示的画面的亮度时，用户可触控第二屏幕的触控区域。接收到用户的触控之后，电子设备执行相应的亮度调整操作。
这种情况下，在一个示例中，电子设备的第一屏幕为该电子设备的正面屏幕区域，而第二屏幕可为该电子设备的侧边区域，该侧边区域通常指的是电子设备的左右两侧的侧边区域。例如，当电子设备应用环幕屏时，参见图2A所示的正视图和图2B所示的侧视图，所述第二屏幕即为该电子设备左右两侧的侧边区域。上述环幕屏也可以被称为曲面屏。
在另一个示例中，电子设备的第一屏幕为该电子设备的正面屏幕区域，而第二屏幕可为该电子设备的侧边区域以及背面区域，该侧边区域通常指的是电子设备的左右两侧的侧边区域。例如，参见图3所示的立体图，当电子设备应用环绕屏时，所述第二屏幕即为该电子设备的侧边区域以及背面区域。
另外，在另一个示例中，电子设备的应用的屏幕为折叠屏，该折叠屏可沿折叠线进行折叠，从而将整个折叠屏划分为两个显示屏，即第一显示屏和第二显示屏。而根据折叠的程度，第一显示屏和第二显示屏可呈现多种状态，例如展开状态和折叠状态。
参见图4A、图4B和图4C所示的折叠屏的示意图，其中，在图4A中，第一显示屏41和第二显示屏42未发生折叠，第一显示屏41和第二显示屏42拼接成一个独立的显示屏幕。
相应的，在本申请实施例中，当第一显示屏41和第二显示屏42之间为展开状态，即第一显示屏41和第二显示屏42的状态如图4A所示时，通常将第一显示屏41和第二显示屏42拼接而成的显示屏幕作为电子设备的第一屏幕，而拼接后的显示屏幕的侧边区域作为第二屏幕。并且，在图4A中，第一显示屏41和第二显示屏42中间即为折叠线43。
另外，图4B和图4C中的两个显示屏处于折叠状态，其中，在图4B中，两个显示屏之间的夹角较小，这种情况下，通常将其中一个显示屏作为显示屏幕，以显示画面，而另外一个显示屏则为电子设备的背面。例如，在图4B中，可将第一显示屏41作为电子设备的显示屏幕，第二显示屏42为电子设备的背面。
相应的，当第一显示屏41和第二显示屏42之间为折叠状态，并且第一显示屏41和第二显示屏42之间的夹角较小，即第一显示屏41和第二显示屏42如图4B所示时，通常将该电子设备的显示屏幕作为第一屏幕，并且，将电子设备的背面和侧边区域作为第二屏幕。
其中，通常认为第一显示屏41和第二显示屏42之间的夹角小于角度阈值时，第一显 示屏41和第二显示屏42之间的夹角较小。该角度阈值可以预先设置，并且在电子设备的使用过程中，该角度阈值还可以进行调整。示例性的，所述角度阈值可以为10度，当然，所述角度阈值也可为其他角度值，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
在图4C中，两个显示屏之间的夹角较大，这种情况下，两个显示屏均可作为显示屏幕，并且第一显示屏41和第二显示屏42可分别显示不同的画面。
相应的，当第一显示屏41和第二显示屏42之间为折叠状态，并且第一显示屏41和第二显示屏42之间的夹角较大，即第一显示屏41和第二显示屏42如图4C所示时，可将两个显示屏均作为第一屏幕，而侧边区域作为第二屏幕。
其中，通常认为第一显示屏41和第二显示屏42之间的夹角不小于所述角度阈值时，第一显示屏41和第二显示屏42之间的夹角较大。
也就是说，应用本申请实施例公开的方法的电子设备同时包括第一屏幕和第二屏幕，所述第一屏幕为所述电子设备的显示屏幕，所述第二屏幕为所述电子设备中不同于所述显示屏幕的其他区域，所述第二屏幕中包括触控区域。在接收到针对所述第二屏幕中的触控区域的触控之后，电子设备会执行与该触控相对应的操作。另外，所述第二屏幕至少包括所述电子设备的侧边区域。当所述电子设备应用环绕屏时，所述第二屏幕还包括电子设备的背面区域，另外，当所述电子设备应用折叠屏，并且折叠屏中的第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角较小时，所述第二屏幕还包括所述电子设备的背面区域。
当然，电子设备还可以应用其他形式的屏幕，相应的，电子设备的第一屏幕与第二屏幕还可以为其他形式，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
在本申请中的电子设备中的第二屏幕包括触控区域，因此，当用户在抓握电子设备时，有可能会误触到第二屏幕的触控区域，从而导致在用户不需要的情况下，电子设备仍会执行该触控区域对应的功能，即电子设备会执行用户不需要的操作。为了解决这一问题，本申请实施例公开一种触控区域调整方法及装置。
示例性的，参见图5A，是本申请实施例提供的另一种配置环幕屏的电子设备的立体示意图，图5A示出了该电子设备的正视图。如图5A和图5B所示，电子设备的显示屏幕包括正面屏幕21、侧边屏幕22和侧边屏幕23。其中，正面屏幕21连接侧边屏幕22和侧边屏幕23，侧边屏幕22和侧边屏幕23是位于电子设备侧面的有弧度的侧边屏幕，侧边屏幕22和侧边屏幕23占据其所在的电子设备的侧面的部分或全部区域。电子设备的侧面还可以包括侧边框。电子设备的背面配置有电子设备的后壳。
示例性的，参见图6A，是本申请实施例提供的另一种配置环绕屏的电子设备的立体示意图，图6B示出了该电子设备的正视图。如图6A和图6B所示，电子设备的屏幕包括屏幕31、屏幕32、侧边屏幕33以及侧边屏幕34。其中，屏幕31位于电子设备的正反面中的一面，屏幕32位于电子设备的正反面中的另一面，侧边屏幕33以及侧边屏幕34是位于电子设备侧面的有弧度的侧边屏幕，图6A所示，环绕屏没有传统终端设备的侧边框。
示例性的，参见图7A至图7C，是本申请实施例提供的另一种配置折叠屏的电子设备的不同形态。如图7A至图7C，电子设备的屏幕可以包括屏幕51、屏幕52和屏幕53。其中，屏幕53连接屏幕51和屏幕52，屏幕53是该电子设备的可折叠区域。当屏幕53发生 弯折或形变时，屏幕53可以形成该电子设备的侧边屏幕。如图7A所示，屏幕53未发生弯折，电子设备的屏幕处于展开形态，屏幕51和屏幕52形成的夹角等于180度。如图7B所示，屏幕53发生弯折，电子设备的屏幕处于半折叠形态，屏幕51和屏幕52形成的夹角1大于0度小于180度。如图7C所示，屏幕53发生弯折，电子设备的显示屏194处于全折叠形态，屏幕51和屏幕52形成的夹角等于0度。图5A和图6A所示的电子设备的左右侧面均配置有侧边屏幕，而配置折叠屏的电子设备折叠形态下只有一个侧边屏幕。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当屏幕51和屏幕52之间的夹角1大于角度阈值1时，屏幕53形成电子设备的侧边屏幕。例如，角度阈值1等于10度。
图5A至图7C所示的显示屏194的侧边屏幕是有弧度甚至可折叠的屏幕。本申请实施例中电子设备的屏幕可以是采用柔性材料制作的柔性屏，柔性材料制作的柔性屏以非刚性玻璃作为基底，曲面屏幕弹性更好，不易破碎。图5A至图7C所示的屏幕可以是一个一体的柔性屏，也可以采用刚性屏和柔性屏拼接组成。
本申请实施例中，侧边屏幕也可以被称为侧边区域。
下面介绍本申请实施例涉及的电子设备的屏幕的结构示意图。
请参见图8A，图8A中示出了本申请实施例涉及的一种电子设备的屏幕40，该终端的屏幕40可以包括保护玻璃、触摸传感器50、显示屏、底板。屏幕40可以是图2A至图7C所示的曲面屏、环绕屏、折叠屏。该触摸传感器50和显示屏可以组成触控屏，其中，触摸传感器50可以是前述实施例中的触摸传感器180K，显示屏可以是前述实施例中的显示屏194，具体内容可以参考上述图1所示装置实施例，在此不作赘述。
其中，触摸传感器50可以包括X轴电极层和Y轴电极层，X轴电极层和Y轴电极层在触摸传感器50上交叉分布，形成图8B所示的M*N的阵列式分布。电子设备会以特定的检测频率，通过X、Y轴的扫描，检测每个坐标点的电容值的变化，并可以根据每个坐标点的电容值的变化确定用户的触摸信息，触摸信息可以包括用户在显示屏194上的接触面的触摸位置、触摸面积。
在一种实现方式中，当用户的手触摸到触控屏上时，用户的手会从Tx电极吸收掉一部分Tx电极发出的激励信号，由此，Rx电极上接收到的激励信号会减弱。终端在扫描检测触摸传感器50上每个坐标点的互电容的大小时，根据各坐标点的电容变化量可以计算出用户的触摸位置。在另一种实现方式中，当用户的手触摸到触控屏时，手的电容将会叠加到触控屏的屏体电容(Tx电极与地构成的自电容，或Rx电极与地构成的自电容)上，使屏体电容量改变。终端在扫描检测触摸传感器50上每个坐标点的上各电极的自电容的大小时，根据各坐标点的各电极的电容变化量，可以确定用户的手的触摸位置。
在一些实施例中，用户的手与图8B所示的触控屏阵列中每个网格对应的屏幕区域的接触面积越大，该网格对应的坐标点的电容变化量越大。可以理解，用户的手在一个网格上的按压力度越大，用户的手与该网格的接触面积越大。
在一些实施例中，电子设备针对用户在触控屏上的触摸操作可以有如下三种检测状态：激活(Active)状态，闲置(Idle)状态，休眠(Sleep)状态。其中，在Active状态下，终端采用第一频率检测触控屏上的触摸操作。例如，第一频率为120Hz。在Idle状态下，终端采用第二频率检测触控屏上的触摸操作。例如，第二频率为1Hz或10Hz。Sleep状态： 在Sleep状态下，终端不检测触控屏上的触摸操作。
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备基于侧边屏幕在显示屏194上的位置分布，可以确定上述M*N的触控屏阵列中第X列至第X+n列坐标点对应侧边屏幕。例如，针对图5A至图5B所示的曲面屏，电子设备确定上述M*N的触控屏阵列中第1列至第n列坐标点对应侧边屏幕21，第N-n+1列至第N列坐标点对应侧边屏幕22。例如，针对图7A至图7C所示的折叠屏，电子设备确定上述M*N的触控屏阵列中居中的n列坐标点对应侧边屏幕53。
传统包括侧边框的电子设备，会通过设置在侧边框的物理按键为用户提供一些快捷功能，上述功能通常是一些使用频率高或者较为通用的功能，例如开关机、音量增减或截屏等等。而图5A至图7C所示的侧边屏幕取代了部分或全部传统侧边框，上述侧边屏幕可以为与用户进行信息交互的触控区域，继续为用户提供上述快捷功能，以及其他更多功能(例如，拍照、电话接听、智能助手及快捷支付等)。例如，电子设备的侧边屏幕可以接收用户的滑动操作，响应于检测到的滑动操作，电子设备可以调整显示屏的显示亮度。
这样，侧边屏幕在提高电子设备的占屏比的同时，还增加了电子设备与用户的交互方式，提升了用户体验。然而，电子设备的侧面是用户手掌握持的位置，因此，作为信息交互的触控区域，在握持状态下，侧边屏幕误操作风险会大大的增加。
因此，握持状态下，如何有效控制侧边屏幕与用户的信息交互是一个重要的问题。本申请实施例提供的触控区域调整方法，可以根据用户的握持状态，调整侧边屏幕中用户可操作的触控区域。所提方法贴合用户使用习惯，有效降低了用户与侧边屏幕交互过程中的误操作风险，提升了用户对侧边屏幕的使用体验。
除了图5A至图7C所示的电子设备，本申请实施例所提供的触控区域调整方法还适用于其他类型的具有侧边屏幕的显示屏，此处不做具体限定。
在本申请的实施例中，公开一种触控区域调整方法。该方法应用于电子设备，所述电子设备包括第一屏幕和第二屏幕，所述第一屏幕为所述电子设备的显示屏幕，所述第二屏幕为所述电子设备中不同于所述显示屏幕的其他区域，所述第二屏幕中包括触控区域。另外，所述第二屏幕至少包括所述电子设备的侧边区域。
这种情况下，参见图9所示的工作流程示意图，本申请实施例公开的触控区域调整方法包括以下步骤：
步骤S11、确定位于第二屏幕，并且感应参数发生变化的第一区域。
在本申请实施例中，通过第二屏幕中感应参数的变化，确定所述第二屏幕中被触碰的区域。其中，所述感应参数可以为多种形式。
参考图2A，电子设备第二屏幕可以包括电子设备的侧边区域。参考图3，电子设备第二屏幕可以包括电子设备的侧边区域和背面区域。参考图4A，电子设备处于折叠状态时，第二屏幕可以包括电子设备的侧边区域和背面区域。
示例性的，第二屏幕中设置有压力传感器，当第二屏幕中某一区域被触碰时，所述压力传感器能够感应到被触碰区域的压力发生变化，并确定压力发生变化的区域为第一区域。这种情况下，所述感应参数为压力。
在另外一个示例中，第二屏幕中设置有温度传感器，当第二屏幕中某一区域被触碰时，所述温度传感器能够感应到被触碰区域的温度发生变化，并确定温度发生变化的区域为第一区域。这种情况下，所述感应参数为温度。
或者，所述第二屏幕中设置有电容传感器，当第二屏幕中某一区域被触碰时，所述电容传感器能够感应到被触碰区域的电容发生变化，并确定电容发生变化的区域为第一区域。这种情况下，所述感应参数为电容。
当然，所述第二屏幕中还可以设置其他类型的传感器，相应的，所述感应参数也可以为其他形式的参数，本申请实施例对此不作限定。并且，所述第二屏幕中还可以同时设置不同类型的传感器，相应的，所述感应参数可以为多种类型的参数的组合。例如，在第二屏幕中同时设置压力传感器和温度传感器，这种情况下，所述感应参数同时包括压力传感器和温度传感器。
步骤S12、根据所述第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势。
需要说明的是，电子设备可以确定位于第二屏幕，并且感应参数发生变化的一或多个第一区域。电子设备可以根据上述一或多个第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势。
在实际应用场景中，电子设备被抓握的手势包括多种，例如，包括单手抓握电子设备的下半部分、单手抓握电子设备的中间部分和双手抓握电子设备的四个边角等。
这种情况下，在步骤S12中，根据第一区域在所述第二屏幕中的位置，可分别确定大鱼际、手指和/或掌心等与侧边区域的接触位置，进而确定电子设备本次被抓握的手势。
步骤S13、根据所述电子设备被抓握的手势，调整所述触控区域在所述第二屏幕中的位置，以使调整后的触控区域远离所述第一区域。
通过所述电子设备被抓握的手势，以及当前触控区域在所述第二屏幕中的位置，即可确定所述第二屏幕的触控区域是否会被触控到。当所述第二屏幕的触控区域较易被触控到时，则调整触控区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，由于调整之后的触控区域远离所述第一区域，而第一区域通常为用户抓握电子设备的区域，当调整之后的触控区域远离所述第一区域时，则表明调整后的触控区域远离电子设备被抓握的区域，触控区域被误触的可能性降低。
例如，当第二屏幕为电子设备的侧边区域，而所述电子设备被抓握的手势为单手抓握电子设备的下半部分时，可将触控区域调整至所述侧边区域的上半部分，从而使调整后的触控区域远离第一区域，避免触控区域被误触。
本申请实施例公开的触控区域调整方法，能够确定第二屏幕中感应参数发生变化的第一区域，并根据所述第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势，再根据该手势调整触控区域在第二屏幕的位置。其中，所述第二屏幕中的触控区域即为扩展的触控区域。也就是说，本申请实施例公开的方案基于电子设备被抓握的手势，对触控区域在第二屏幕中的位置进行调整，使调整后的触控区域远离第一区域，从而避免第二屏幕的触控区域被误触，提高用户的使用体验。
另外，在本申请实施例中，电子设备设置了第二屏幕的触控区域对应的功能，当所述触控区域被触控之后，电子设备会实现该功能。在通过本申请实施例的方案，调整第二屏 幕的触控区域的位置之后，当被调整的触控区域被触控时，电子设备会执行该触控区域的功能。也就是说，即使第二屏幕的触控区域的位置被调整，电子设备仍能实现相应的功能。
例如，当侧边区域的触控区域用于对电子设备的音量进行调节，并且该触控区域位于侧边区域中的第一位置时，在该触控区域被调整至侧边区域的第二位置之后，如果侧边区域被触控，电子设备会确定被触控的区域是否为第二位置。当电子设备确定被触控的区域为第二位置时，电子设备再执行相应的音量调节操作。
在步骤S12中，公开了根据所述第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势的操作。其中，所述第一区域为电子设备的第二屏幕中，感应参数发生变化的区域。在有些应用场景下，受到外界干扰，第二屏幕的部分区域也会发生感应参数的变化。因此，为了提高确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势的准确性，本申请公开另一些实施例。在该实施例中，参见图10A所示的工作流程示意图，在根据所述第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势之前，还包括以下步骤：
步骤S14、当所述第一区域包括两个以上时，计算所述第一区域的感应参数的变化量。
步骤S15、确定所述第一区域中的第一目标区域，所述第一目标区域为所述感应参数的变化量大于第一阈值的第一区域。
这种情况下，步骤S12中所述的根据所述第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势，包括：
根据所述第一目标区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势。
也就是说，在本申请实施例中，在确定第一区域之后，进一步计算各个第一区域的感应参数的变化量，再基于该变化量与第一阈值的比较，确定第一目标区域，并根据所述第一目标区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势。
电子设备有时会因为受到干扰，导致第二屏幕中的感应参数发生变化。例如，第二屏幕有时会接触到外物(例如树叶、雨滴等)，而接触到外物的位置的感应参数会发生变化。当由于外物的干扰，导致第二屏幕中某一位置的感应参数发生变化时，该位置的感应参数的变化量通常较小。通过上述步骤，确定感应参数的变化量大于第一阈值的第一目标区域，并根据所述第一目标区域确定电子设备被抓握的手势，从而能够减少干扰造成的影响，提高确定电子设备被抓握的手势的精确度。
示例性的，如图10B所示，电子设备确定位于第二屏幕的5个第一区域，包括第一区域61、第一区域62、第一区域63、第一区域64和第一区域65。电子设备计算图10B所示的每个第一区域的感应参数的变化量，其中，第一区域61、第一区域62、第一区域63和第一区域64的感应参数的变化量均大于第一阈值，第一区域65的感应参数的变化量小于等于第一阈值。电子设备确定感应参数的变化量大于第一阈值的第一区域为第一目标区域，如图10B所示，第一目标区域包括第一区域61、第一区域62、第一区域63和第一区域64。电子设备可以根据第一目标区域，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势，如图10B所示，第一目标区域包括大鱼际与第二屏幕中的左侧边区域的接触区域(即第一区域61)，以及用户的手指与第二屏幕中的右侧边区域的接触区域(即第一区域62、第一区域63和第一区域64)，因此，电子设备确定用户左手单手握持电子设备。
通过步骤S13至步骤S14的操作，能够基于各个第一区域的感应参数的变化量，确定 第一目标区域，再根据第一目标区域确定电子设备被抓握的手势的精确度。通过这一些实施例，能够减少外界干扰的影响，进一步提高确定电子设备被抓握的手势的精确度。
或者，在另一种可行的实现方式中，参见图11A所示的工作流程示意图，在根据所述第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势之前，还包括以下步骤：
步骤S16、当所述第一区域包括两个以上时，获取所述第一区域的面积。
步骤S17、确定所述第一区域中的第二目标区域，所述第二目标区域为面积大于第二阈值的第一区域。
这种情况下，步骤S12中所述的根据所述第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势，包括：
根据所述第二目标区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势。
电子设备有时会因为受到干扰，导致第二屏幕中的感应参数发生变化。而干扰导致的第一区域的面积往往较小。这种情况下，当某一个第一区域的面积不大于第二阈值时，通常认为该第一区域是由干扰导致的。在本申请实施例中，可根据人手掌大小的范围确定所述第二阈值。例如，可通过大数据采集的方式，获取多个用户的手掌的大小，据此统计手掌中各个手指所占据的面积，然后，确定所述第二阈值为略小于所述各个手指所占据的面积中的最小值。这种情况下，当用户触控电子设备的第二屏幕时，由触控操作导致的第一区域的面积大于所述第二阈值。
当然，还可以通过其他方式设置第二阈值，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
通过步骤S16至步骤S17的操作，能够基于各个第一区域的面积，确定第一区域中面积大于第二阈值的第二目标区域，再根据第二目标区域确定电子设备被抓握的手势，从而能够减少外界干扰的影响，进一步提高确定电子设备被抓握的手势的精确度。
示例性的，如图11B所示，电子设备确定位于第二屏幕的5个第一区域，包括第一区域71、第一区域72、第一区域73、第一区域74和第一区域75。电子设备确定图11B所示的每个第一区域的面积，其中，第一区域71、第一区域72、第一区域73和第一区域64的面积均大于第二阈值，第一区域75的面积小于等于第二阈值。电子设备确定面积大于第二阈值的第一区域为第一目标区域，如图11B所示，第一目标区域包括第一区域71、第一区域72、第一区域73和第一区域74。电子设备可以根据第一目标区域，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势，类似于图10B，根据图11B所示的第一目标区域，电子设备可以确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势为左手单手握持。
步骤S13至步骤S14的操作，以及步骤S16至步骤S17的操作，分别公开了根据感应参数的变化量确定第一目标区域，以及根据第一区域的面积确定第二目标区域的方案。在另一可行的实现方式中，还可以同时根据感应参数的变化量和第一区域的面积，确定相应的目标区域。
这种情况下，在根据感应参数的变化量确定第一区域中的第一目标区域，以及根据第一区域的面积，确定第一区域中的第二目标区域之后，确定所述第一目标区域和第二目标区域中的重合区域。相应的，在该实施例中，所述根据所述第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势，包括：根据所述第一目标区域和第二目标区域中的重合区域，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势。
示例性的，如图11C所示，电子设备确定位于第二屏幕的6个第一区域，包括第一区域81、第一区域82、第一区域83、第一区域84、第一区域85和第一区域86。电子设备确定图11C所示的每个第一区域的感应参数的变化量以及面积，其中，第一区域81、第一区域82、第一区域83和第一区域84的感应参数的变化量大于第一阈值，且面积均大于第二阈值，第一区域85的感应参数的变化量小于第一阈值，第一区域86的面积小于第二阈值。电子设备确定感应参数的变化量大于第一阈值且面积大于第二阈值的第一区域为第一目标区域，如图11C所示，第一目标区域包括第一区域81、第一区域82、第一区域83和第一区域84。电子设备可以根据第一目标区域，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势，类似于图10B，根据图11C所示的第一目标区域，电子设备可以确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势为左手单手握持。
上述方案同时考虑了感应参数的变化量和第一区域的面积，能够进一步减少外界干扰的影响，提高后续确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势的精确度。
在上述实施例中，公开了根据所述第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势的操作，其中，所述电子设备被抓握的手势往往包含多种，并且不同电子设备应用的屏幕往往不同。因此，在本申请实施例中，可通过多种方式确定电子设备被抓握的手势。
在本申请实施例中，电子设备的第二屏幕通常包括多种形式。在其中一种形式中，所述电子设备的第二屏幕包括所述电子设备的侧边区域。
例如，当所述电子设备应用环幕屏时，所述第二屏幕为该电子设备的侧边区域。
或者，在另一示例中，电子设备采用折叠屏，该折叠屏包括第一显示屏和第二显示屏，当所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间为展开状态，即第一显示屏和第二显示屏拼接为一个显示屏幕，即第一显示屏和第二显示屏如图4A所示时时，可将拼接成的显示屏幕作为第一屏幕，而拼接后的显示屏幕的侧边区域为第二屏幕，即所述电子设备采用折叠屏，折叠屏中的第一显示屏和第二显示屏处于展开状态时，所述第二屏幕包括所述电子设备的侧边区域。
另外，当折叠屏中的第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角较大时，即第一显示屏和第二显示屏如图4C所示时，可将两个显示屏均作为第一屏幕，而两个显示屏的侧边区域分别作为第二屏幕，即所述电子设备采用折叠屏，折叠屏中的第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角较大时，所述第二屏幕分别包括所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏的侧边区域。
其中，当所述电子设备应用折叠屏时，需要确定所述折叠屏的状态(即展开状态还是折叠状态)。在本申请实施例中，可确定第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角，当所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角为180度时，则确定所述折叠屏的状态为展开状态，当所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角并非180度时，则确定所述折叠屏的状态为折叠状态。
另外，在确定所述折叠屏的状态为折叠状态之后，还可将所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角与角度阈值(例如10度)相比较，当所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角大于所述角度阈值时，则认为所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角较大，所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏处于图4C的状态。
在本申请实施中，可在所述电子设备中设置一个或多个传感器，并通过所述一个或多个传感器检测到的数据确定所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角。
示例性的，可以在电子设备的第一显示屏和第二显示屏设置陀螺仪和加速度传感器。其中，设置在所述第一显示屏的陀螺仪可检测第一显示屏转动时的转动角速度，第一显示屏中的加速度传感器可检测所述第一显示屏运动时产生的加速度。相应的，设置在所述第二显示屏的陀螺仪可检测第二显示屏转动时的转动角速度，第二显示屏中的加速度传感器可检测所述第二显示屏运动时产生的加速度。然后，基于第一显示屏的转动角速度和加速度，以及所述第二显示屏的转动角速度和加速度，即可计算得到所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角。
当所述第一屏幕包括电子设备的侧边区域时，参见图12所示的工作流程示意图，所述根据所述第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势，包括以下步骤：
步骤S121、根据位于所述电子设备的侧边区域的第一区域的长度，确定所述位于所述电子设备的侧边区域的第一区域中的长轴区域和短轴区域，其中，所述长轴区域为所述第一区域中长度大于等于第三阈值的第一区域，所述短轴区域为所述第一区域中长度小于等于第四阈值的第一区域。
在一种实现方式中，第三阈值等于第四阈值。
在步骤S121中，根据长度将第一区域划分为两种类型，即长轴区域和短轴区域。用户在抓握电子设备时，通常用户的大拇指、大鱼际或掌心等位置会接触电子设备其中一侧的侧边区域，从而在所述其中一侧的侧边区域的位置出现长轴区域，即长轴区域对应的是用户抓握电子设备时，大拇指、大鱼际或掌心等接触到侧边区域的位置。而其余的手指往往接触到电子设备的另一侧的侧边区域，从而在所述另一侧的侧边区域的位置出现短轴区域，即短轴区域对应的是用户抓握电子设备时，其他手指接触到侧边区域的位置。
在一些实施例中，第一区域的长度为第一区域沿电子设备长边的最大长度。另外，在本申请实施例中，预先确定所述第三阈值和第四阈值。例如，可预先通过大数据采集的方式，获取多个用户在单手抓握电子设备时，大拇指、大鱼际或掌心等位置接触侧边区域的长度，以及除大拇指以外其他手指接触侧边区域的长度，据此确定第三阈值和第四阈值。
当然，还可以通过其他方式确定所述第三阈值和第四阈值，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
步骤S122、当所述长轴区域与所述短轴区域分别位于不同的侧边区域时，确定所述长轴区域和所述短轴区域的数量。
在一些实施例中，电子设备确定每个侧边区域上长轴区域和短轴区域的数量。当电子设备的长轴区域仅位于电子设备的一个侧边区域上，电子设备的短轴区域仅位于电子设备的另一个侧边区域上，电子设备执行步骤123。当电子设备的两个侧边区域均包括长轴区域时，电子设备确定电子设备被抓握的手势为双手纵向握持。
当电子设备被用户抓握时，大拇指、大鱼际或掌心等位置，以及除大拇指以外的其他手指位于不同侧，即长轴区域与短轴区域应该位于不同的侧边区域。如果所述长轴区域与其中任意一个短轴区域位于同一侧边区域，则表明所述长轴区域或者其中任意一个短轴区 域，并非为用户抓握电子设备所导致的感应参数变化的区域，不能用于确定电子设备被抓握的手势。因此，在上述步骤中，当确定长轴区域与所述短轴区域分别位于不同的侧边区域时，再确定所述长轴区域和所述短轴区域的数量。
步骤S123、当所述长轴区域只有一个，所述短轴区域的数量不大于n，并且所述长轴区域与所述短轴区域均位于所述电子设备的第一部分时，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势为第一单手抓握手势。
其中，所述电子设备沿分界线划分第一部分和第二部分，所述分界线的方向与所述电子设备的宽的方向平行。通常情况下，所述分界线位于所述电子设备的中间位置，当所述电子设备竖直状态放置时，所述分界线将所述电子设备分成上半区域和下半区域两部分，所述第一部分为所述电子设备的下半区域，所述第一部分为所述电子设备的上半区域。
参见图13所示的电子设备的第一区域示意图，在图13中，其中黑颜色的部分即为侧边区域中的第一区域，所述第一区域包括长轴区域91和短轴区域92。另外，图13中的虚线即为分界线。
在本申请实施例中，n为预设的正整数。用户在抓握电子设备时，大拇指、大鱼际或掌心等位置，以及除大拇指以外的其他手指位于不同侧，这种情况下，长轴区域只有一个，而接触侧边区域的手指通常为除大拇指以外的其他手指不超过四个，因此，n通常可设置为4。
如果所述长轴区域不只一个，则表明长轴区域的感应参数的变化并非用户抓握电子设备所导致的。另外，如果短轴区域的数量大于n，则表明短轴区域的感应参数的变化并非用户抓握电子设备所导致的。这两种情况下，均无需通过第一区域确定电子设备被抓握的手势。
通过步骤S121至步骤S123的操作可知，当所述长轴区域只有一个，所述短轴区域的数量不大于n，并且所述长轴区域与所述短轴区域均位于所述电子设备的第一部分时，则确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势为第一单手抓握手势。其中，所述第一单手抓握手势指的是单手抓握电子设备(例如，右手纵向握持或左手纵向握持)，并且用户抓握的是电子设备的第一部分。
另外，当电子设备被抓握的手势为第一单手抓握手势时，所述根据所述电子设备被抓握的手势，调整所述触控区域在所述第二屏幕中的位置，包括以下步骤：
首先，确定位于第一侧边区域的第二部分中，并且与所述长轴区域的距离为第一距离h1的第二区域，其中，所述第一侧边区域为所述长轴区域所在的侧边区域。在图13中，所述第一侧边区域为右侧的侧边区域。
在本申请实施例中，两个区域之间的距离指的是两个区域之间的最短距离。在确定两个区域之间的距离时，可确定分别位于两个区域的任意两点之间的连线，各条连线中最短连线的长度即为所述两个区域之间的距离。在一种实现方式中，两个区域之间的最短距离指两个区域沿电子设备长边的最短距离。
然后，确定位于第二侧边区域的第二部分中，并且与所述短轴区域的距离为第二距离h2的第三区域，所述第二侧边区域为所述短轴区域所在的侧边区域。在图14中，所述第二侧边区域为左侧的侧边区域。
最后，将第一触控区域调整至所述第二区域和/或所述第三区域中，其中，所述第一触控区域为位于所述电子设备的侧边区域中的触控区域。
在一些实施例中，参考图13，在一些实施例中，当长轴区域位于一个侧边区域的下半区域，短轴区域位于另一个侧边区域的下半区域，电子设备确定抓握的手势为第一单手抓握手势。
由图13和图14可知，在一些实施例中，当长轴区域位于电子设备的侧边区域1的下半区域，且短轴区域位于电子设备的侧边区域2的下半区域，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于侧边区域1的上半区域和侧边区域2的上半区域。其中，侧边区域1中长轴区域与第一触控区域的最短距离为h1，侧边区域2中短轴区域与第一触控区域的最短距离为h2。
其中，第二区域与第三区域均为远离用户手掌的区域。这种情况下，可将第一触控区域调整至第二区域或第三区域中。另外，当第一触控区域对应两个以上的功能时，还可将第一触控区域划分为第一子触控区域和第二子触控区域，所述第一子触控区域和第二走触控区域对应不同的功能，并分别调整至第二区域和第三区域中。例如，当第一触控区域对应的功能包括亮度调节和音量调节时，可确定第一子触控区域对应的功能为亮度调节，并将所述第一子触控区域调整至所述第二区域中，以及确定第二子触控区域对应的功能为音量调节，并将所述第二子触控区域调整至所述第三区域中。
为了明确第二区域和第三区域，本申请实施例公开了图14所示的第一单手抓握手势的示意图，在该示意图中，包括大拇指、大鱼际或掌心等位置101，该位置在接触电子设备时，导致出现长轴区域，以及包括除大拇指以外的其他手指102，所述其他手指102在接触电子设备时，导致出现短轴区域。另外，在图14中包括位于第一侧边区域的第二部分中，并且与所述长轴区域的距离为第一距离h1的第二区域，由于该第二区域与大拇指、大鱼际或掌心等位置之间的距离为第一距离h1，则第二区域能够远离大拇指、大鱼际或掌心等位置。另外，在图15中包括位于第二侧边区域的第二部分中，并且与所述短轴区域的距离为第二距离h2的第三区域，由于该第三区域与除大拇指以外的其他手指之间的距离为h2，则第三区域能够远离除大拇指以外的其他手指。因此，第一触控区域调整至第二区域和/或第三区域中之后，用户的手指通常不会再对第一触控区域造成误触。
另外，在本申请实施例中，第一距离h1和第二距离h2可以为相同的距离，也可以为不同的距离，本申请实施例对此不作限定。
在另外一种可行的方式中，参见图15所示的工作流程示意图，所述电子设备的第二屏幕包括所述电子设备的侧边区域，这种情况下，所述根据所述第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势，包括以下步骤：
步骤S124、根据位于所述电子设备的侧边区域的第一区域的长度，确定所述位于所述电子设备的侧边区域的第一区域中的长轴区域和短轴区域，其中，所述长轴区域为所述第一区域中长度不小于第三阈值的区域，所述短轴区域为所述第一区域中长度不大于第四阈值的第一区域。
步骤S125、当所述长轴区域与所述短轴区域分别位于不同的侧边区域时，确定所述长轴区域和所述短轴区域的数量。
其中，步骤S124至步骤S125的操作过程可与步骤S121至步骤S122的操作过程相同， 可相互参照，此处不再赘述。
步骤S126、当所述长轴区域只有一个，所述短轴区域的数量不大于n，并且所述短轴区域同时占据所述电子设备的第一部分和第二部分，所述长轴区域位于所述电子设备的第一部分时，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势为第二单手抓握手势。
其中，所述电子设备沿分界线划分第一部分和第二部分，所述分界线的方向与所述电子设备的宽的方向平行。通常情况下，所述分界线位于所述电子设备的中间位置，当所述电子设备竖直状态放置时，所述分界线将所述电子设备分成上半区域和下半区域两部分，所述第一部分为所述电子设备的下半区域，所述第一部分为所述电子设备的上半区域。
参见图16所示的电子设备的第一区域示意图，在图16中，其中黑颜色的部分即为侧边区域中的第一区域，所述第一区域包括长轴区域121和短轴区域122。另外，图16中的虚线即为分界线。
在本申请实施例中，n为预设的正整数。用户在抓握电子设备时，大拇指、大鱼际或掌心等位置，以及除大拇指以外的其他手指位于不同侧，这种情况下，长轴区域只有一个，而接触侧边区域的手指通常为除大拇指以外的其他手指不超过四个，因此，n通常可设置为4。
如果所述长轴区域不只一个，则表明长轴区域的感应参数的变化并非用户抓握电子设备所导致的。另外，如果短轴区域的数量大于n，则表明短轴区域的感应参数的变化并非用户抓握电子设备所导致的。这两种情况下，均无需通过第一区域确定电子设备被抓握的手势。
通过步骤S124至步骤S126的操作可知，当所述长轴区域只有一个，所述短轴区域的数量不大于n，并且所述短轴区域同时占据所述电子设备的第一部分和第二部分，所述长轴区域位于所述电子设备的第一部分时，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势为第二单手抓握手势。
其中，所述第二单手抓握手势指的是单手抓握电子设备，并且大拇指、大鱼际或掌心等位置位于电子设备的第一部分，而除大拇指以外的其他手指一部分处于电子设备的第一部分，另一部分位于电子设备的第二部分。
另外，当电子设备被抓握的手势为第一单手抓握手势时，所述根据所述电子设备被抓握的手势，调整所述触控区域在所述第二屏幕中的位置，包括以下步骤：
首先，确定位于第一侧边区域的第二部分中，并且与所述长轴区域的距离为第三距离h3的第四区域，其中，所述第一侧边区域为所述长轴区域所在的侧边区域。其中，在图16中，所述第一侧边区域为右侧的侧边区域。
然后，将第一触控区域调整至所述第四区域中，其中，所述第一触控区域为位于所述电子设备的侧边区域中的触控区域。
其中，当电子设备被抓握的手势为第二单手抓握手势时，确定的所述第四区域距离大拇指、大鱼际或掌心等位置较远，从而能够减少对第一触控区域的误触。并且，由于短轴区域同时占用了电子设备的第一部分和第二部分，因此，短轴区域所在的侧边区域不再作为第一触控区域，从而避免手指对第一触控区域造成误触。
为了明确所述第四区域，本申请实施例公开了图17所示的第二单手抓握手势的示意图， 在该示意图中，包括大拇指、大鱼际或掌心等位置131，该位置在接触电子设备时，导致出现长轴区域，以及包括除大拇指以外的其他手指132，所述其他手指102在接触电子设备时，导致出现短轴区域。另外，在图17中包括位于第一侧边区域的第二部分，并且与所述长轴区域的距离为第三距离h3的第四区域，以及包括短轴区域，由于该第四区域与大拇指、大鱼际或掌心等位置之间的距离为第三距离h3，则第四区域能够远离大拇指、大鱼际或掌心等位置。因此，第一触控区域调整至第四区域中之后，用户的手指通常不会再对第一触控区域造成误触。
在一些实施例中，参考图16，在一些实施例中，当长轴区域位于一个侧边区域的下半区域，短轴区域的部分或全部位于另一个侧边区域的上半区域，电子设备确定抓握的手势为第二单手抓握手势。
由图16和图17可知，在一些实施例中，当长轴区域位于电子设备的侧边区域1的下半区域，且短轴区域的部分或全部位于电子设备的侧边区域2的上半区域，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于侧边区域1的上半区域。其中，侧边区域1中长轴区域与第一触控区域的最短距离为h3。可以理解，侧边区域2全部为非触控区域。
另外，在本申请实施例中，所述第三距离h3可以与第一距离h1或第二距离h2为相同的距离，也可以为与第一距离h1和第二距离h2均不相同的距离，本申请实施例对此不作限定。
在另外一种可行的方式中，参见图18所示的工作流程示意图，所述电子设备的第二屏幕包括所述电子设备的侧边区域，这种情况下，所述根据所述第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势，包括以下步骤：
步骤S127、如果所述电子设备处于横屏状态，当位于所述电子设备的侧边区域的第一区域的数量N为不大于4且不小于2的正整数，并且所述位于所述电子设备的侧边区域的第一区域分别位于所述电子设备不同的角落时，获取所述第一区域的面积。
在本申请实施例中，N为不大于4，并且不小于2的正整数，即N的值为2、3或4。
如果所述电子设备处于横屏状态，当位于所述电子设备的侧边区域的第一区域的数量N为不大于4且不小于2的正整数，并且所述位于所述电子设备的侧边区域的第一区域分别位于所述电子设备不同的角落时，则表明可能是用户持握电子设备的角落时所导致的所述第一区域。这种情况下，由于用户持握电子设备的角落时，通常最少采用两个手指，最多采用四个手指(即四个手指分别持握电子设备的四个角落)，因此，N为不大于4，并且不小于2的正整数。
步骤S128、当所述第一区域的面积均在预设的第一面积范围内时，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势为横屏抓握手势。
当用户通过持握电子设备的角落时，第一区域分别由用户不同手指接触侧边区域产生，由于手指在侧边区域形成的接触面的面积需要在一定范围(即预设的第一面积范围)内，这种情况下，当通过步骤S127获取到的第一区域的面积均在所述预设的第一面积范围内时，则表明所述第一区域均由用户的抓握手势造成，因此，可确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势为横屏抓握手势。
另外，在本申请实施例中，需要预先确定所述第一面积范围。例如，可预先通过大数 据采集的方式，获取多个用户在持握电子设备的四个角落时，手指接触侧边区域的面积，据此确定所述第一面积范围。
当然，还可以通过其他方式确定所述第一面积范围，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
另外，根据步骤S127至步骤S128，可确定电子设备被抓握的手势是否为横屏抓握手势，当所述第一区域的数量为4，即所述横屏抓握手势由用户的四根手指(例如双手的大拇指和食指)完成，并且所述四根手指分别持握电子设备的四个角落时，第一区域的示意图如图19所示，在图19中，黑颜色的部分即为侧边区域中的第一区域，并且所述第一区域为四个，四个第一区域分别位于电子设备的四个角落。
当所述电子设备被抓握的手势为横屏抓握手势时，所述根据所述电子设备被抓握的手势，调整所述触控区域在所述第二屏幕中的位置，包括以下步骤：
首先，确定位于所述电子设备的侧边区域中的第五区域，所述第五区域与所述第一区域之间的距离不小于第四距离h4。
然后，将第一触控区域调整至所述第五区域中，其中，所述第一触控区域为位于所述电子设备的侧边区域中的触控区域。
在本申请实施例中，当电子设备被抓握的手势为横屏抓握手势时，将第一触控区域调整至第五区域，而第五区域与第一区域之间的距离不小于第四距离h4，因此，调整之后的第一触控区域与所述第一区域之间的距离不小于第四距离h4，即调整之后的第一触控区域远离用户手掌，从而能够避免调整之后的第一触控区域被误触。
为了明确第五区域，本申请实施例公开了图20所示的横屏抓握手势的示意图，在该示意图中，设定第一区域的数量为四个，并分别位于电子设备的四个角落，第五区域与各个第一区域之间的距离均不小于第四距离h4。
进一步的，在本申请实施例中，当所述电子设备处于非水平的状态时，在确定位于所述电子设备的侧边区域中的第五区域之后，还包括：
确定位于所述电子设备上方的侧边区域中的第五区域。
这种情况下，所述将所述触控区域调整至所述第五区域中，包括：
将所述第一触控区域调整至所述位于所述电子设备上方的侧边区域中的第五区域中。
当电子设备处于横屏状态时，如果电子设备还处于非水平状态，则用户在做出横屏抓握手势时，通常大拇指放置在电子设备下方的侧边区域，食指放置在在电子设备上方的侧边区域。与大拇指相比，食指通常较为灵活，因此，暂时终止电子设备下方的侧边区域的触控功能，而是选择将第一触控区域调整至电子设备上方的侧边区域，即将所述第一触控区域调整至上方侧边区域中的第五区域中，从而便于用户的食指对所述第一触控区域进行触控操作。
这种情况下，由于调整之后的第一触控区域距离电子设备的四个角落较远，相应的，距离用户的手指较远，这种情况下，不易对第一触控区域造成触碰，从而避免手指对第一触控区域造成误触。
在另外一种可行的方式中，参见图21所示的工作流程示意图，所述根据所述第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势，包括以下步骤：
步骤S129、根据位于所述电子设备的侧边区域的第一区域的长度，确定所述位于所述 电子设备的侧边区域的第一区域中的长轴区域和短轴区域，其中，所述长轴区域为所述第一区域中长度不小于第三阈值的区域，所述短轴区域为所述第一区域中长度不大于第四阈值的第一区域。
其中，步骤S129的操作过程与步骤S121的操作过程相同，可相互参照，此处不再赘述。
步骤S130、获取所述长轴区域位于所述电子设备的第二部分占所述长轴区域的第一比例，以及获取所述短轴区域位于所述电子设备的第二部分占所述短轴区域的第二比例。
步骤S131、当所述第一比例和第二比例均大于第五阈值时，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势为第三单手抓握手势。
其中，当第一比例和第二比例均大于第五阈值时，则表明用户在抓握电子设备时，大鱼际、大拇指或掌心等位置处的大部分位于电子设备的第二部分，以及除大拇指以外的其他手指的大部分也位于电子设备的第二部分。
所述电子设备沿分界线划分第一部分和第二部分，所述分界线的方向与所述电子设备的宽的方向平行。通常情况下，所述分界线位于所述电子设备的中间位置，当所述电子设备竖直状态放置时，所述分界线将所述电子设备分成上半区域和下半区域两部分，所述第一部分为所述电子设备的下半区域，所述第一部分为所述电子设备的上半区域。
这种情况下，可知第三单手抓握手势对应的第一区域如图22所示，在图22中，其中黑颜色的部分即为侧边区域中的第一区域，所述第一区域包括长轴区域181和短轴区域182。另外，图22中的虚线即为分界线。
在一些实施例中，参考图21，在一些实施例中，当长轴区域的部分或全部位于一个侧边区域的上半区域，短轴区域的部分或全部位于另一个侧边区域的上半区域，电子设备确定抓握的手势为第三单手抓握手势。
由图21和图22可知，在一些实施例中，当长轴区域的部分或全部位于电子设备的侧边区域1的上半区域，且短轴区域的部分或全部位于电子设备的侧边区域2的上半区域，电子设备确定侧边区域1和侧边区域2均为非触控区域。
另外，当所述电子设备被抓握的手势为第三单手抓握手势时，所述根据所述电子设备被抓握的手势，调整所述触控区域在所述第二屏幕中的位置，包括以下步骤：
暂停第一触控区域的触控功能，其中，所述第一触控区域为位于所述电子设备的侧边区域中的触控区域。
在本申请实施例中，暂停某一触控区域的触控功能，指的是即使该触控区域接收到触控操作，电子设备也不再执行该触控区域对应的功能。
所述第三单手抓握手势的示意图如图23所示，在该示意图中，包括大拇指、大鱼际或掌心等位置191，该位置在接触电子设备时，导致出现长轴区域，以及包括除大拇指以外的其他手指192，所述其他手指192在接触电子设备时，导致出现短轴区域。通过图23可以确定，由于所述第一比例和第二比例均大于第五阈值，则表明用户的掌心、大拇指或大鱼际等位置大部分位于电子设备的第二部分，并且除大拇指以外的其他手指的大部分也位于电子设备的第二部分，这种情况下，用户本次对电子设备的抓握通常为用户的非正常操作，因此，确定所述侧边区域暂停触控功能，从而避免对第一触控区域的误触。
上述的各个实施例中，分别公开了当所述第二屏幕包括电子设备的侧边区域时，确定第一单手抓握手势、第二单手抓握手势、第三单手抓握手势和横屏抓握手势的方法，以及当用户分别通过第一单手抓握手势、第二单手抓握手势、第三单手抓握手势和横屏抓握手势对电子设备进行抓握时，调整第一触控区域的方式，其中，所述第一触控区域为位于所述电子设备的侧边区域中的触控区域。
另外，所述第二屏幕还可包括电子设备的背面区域，这种情况下，所述电子设备的背面区域设置有相应的触控区域，在本申请实施例中，设置在所述电子设备的背面区域的触控区域可称为第二触控区域。
例如，当电子设备应用环绕屏时，所述第二屏幕同时包括该电子设备的侧边区域以及背面区域。这种情况下，用户在抓握电子设备时，还可能对第二触控区域造成误触。
另外，电子设备还可能应用折叠屏，所述折叠屏包括第一显示屏和第二显示屏，当所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间为折叠状态，并且第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角较小，即第一显示屏和第二显示屏的示意图如图4B所示时，通常将所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏中的一个显示屏作为显示屏幕，该显示屏幕即为第一屏幕，用于显示画面。而另外一个显示屏则为电子设备的背面。这种情况下，将所述另外一个显示屏和所述电子设备的侧边区域作为第二屏幕。
当所述第二屏幕包括电子设备的背面区域时，为了减少对第二触控区域的误触，还可以根据所述第一区域在所述背面区域的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势，并根据所述电子设备被抓握的手势，调整所述触控区域在所述第二屏幕中的位置。
在其中一种可行的实现方式中，参见图24所示的工作流程示意图，所述根据所述第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势，包括以下步骤：
步骤S132、确定位于所述电子设备的背面区域的第一区域的面积。
步骤S133、当所述第一区域的面积在第二面积范围内时，确定所述第一区域位于所述电子设备的第二部分的面积与所述第一区域的面积的比值。
其中，所述电子设备沿分界线划分第一部分和第二部分，所述分界线的方向与所述电子设备的宽的方向平行。通常情况下，所述分界线位于所述电子设备的中间位置，当所述电子设备竖直状态放置时，所述分界线将所述电子设备分成上半区域和下半区域两部分，所述第一部分为所述电子设备的下半区域，所述第一部分为所述电子设备的上半区域。
步骤S134、当所述比值大于第六阈值时，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势为第四单手抓握手势，当所述比值不大于所述第六阈值时，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势为第五单手抓握手势。
为了明确第四单手抓握手势和第五单手抓握手势所对应的第一区域，本申请实施例分别公开图25和图26，在图25和图26中，黑颜色的部分即为侧边区域中的第一区域。另外，图25和图26中的虚线即为所述分界线。
其中，当所述比值大于第六阈值时，第一区域示意图如图25所示。根据图25可知，所述第四单手抓握手势指的是单手抓握电子设备，并且用户手掌大部分面积位于所述电子设备的第二部分。另外，当所述比值不大于第六阈值时，第一区域示意图如图26所示。根据图26可知，所述第四单手抓握手势指的是单手抓握电子设备，并且用户手掌大部分面积 位于所述电子设备的第一部分。
另外，当电子设备被抓握的手势为第四单手抓握手势时，所述根据所述电子设备被抓握的手势，调整所述触控区域在所述第二屏幕中的位置，包括以下步骤：
暂停第二触控区域的触控功能，其中，所述第二触控区域为位于所述电子设备的背面区域中的触控区域。
所述第四单手抓握手势指的是单手抓握电子设备，并且用户手掌大部分面积位于所述电子设备的第二部分，即所述第四单手抓握手势的示意图如图27所示。这种情况下，用户本次对电子设备的抓握通常为用户的非正常操作，因此，确定所述背面区域暂停触控功能，从而避免对第二触控区域的误触。
另外，当电子设备被抓握的手势为第五单手抓握手势时，所述根据所述电子设备被抓握的手势，调整所述触控区域在所述第二屏幕中的位置，包括以下步骤：
首先，确定位于所述电子设备的背面区域中，并且与所述第一区域的距离为第四距离h4的第六区域。
然后，将第二触控区域调整至所述第六区域中，其中，所述第二触控区域为位于所述电子设备的侧边区域中的触控区域。
其中，所述第五单手抓握手势指的是单手抓握电子设备，并且用户手掌大部分面积位于所述电子设备的第一部分，即所述第五单手抓握手势的示意图如图28所示。这种情况下，用户将第二触控区域调整至第六区域中，则调整后的第二触控区域能够远离用户手掌，从而避免对第二触控区域的误触。
进一步的，当所述电子设备应用折叠屏时，电子设备需要确定所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角，当第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角较小时，电子设备再确定其中一个显示屏为所述电子设备的背面区域。
在本申请实施中，可在所述电子设备中设置一个或多个传感器，并通过所述一个或多个传感器检测到的数据确定所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角。
示例性的，可以在电子设备的第一显示屏和第二显示屏设置陀螺仪和加速度传感器。其中，设置在所述第一显示屏的陀螺仪可检测第一显示屏转动时的转动角速度，第一显示屏中的加速度传感器可检测所述第一显示屏运动时产生的加速度。相应的，设置在所述第二显示屏的陀螺仪可检测第二显示屏转动时的转动角速度，第二显示屏中的加速度传感器可检测所述第二显示屏运动时产生的加速度。然后，基于第一显示屏的转动角速度和加速度，以及所述第二显示屏的转动角速度和加速度，即可计算得到所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角。
在确定所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角之后，将所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角与角度阈值(例如10度)相比较，当所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角小于所述角度阈值时，通常认为所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角较小，确定其中一个显示屏作为显示屏幕，以显示画面，而另一个显示屏作为所述电子设备的背面区域。
这种情况下，所述另一个显示屏也可作为第二屏幕，以便用户对其进行触控。例如，设定第一显示屏为显示屏幕，第二显示屏作为第二屏幕，设置有第二触控区域，所述第二触控区域用于对音量和亮度调节。当第一显示屏在播放视频时，用户可触控第二显示屏的 第二触控区域，以实现对播放的视频的音量和亮度调节。相应的，电子设备可通过步骤S132至步骤S134的操作，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势，并根据所述电子设备被抓握的手势，对所述第二触控区域进行调整。
但是，电子设备需要确定折叠屏中的哪一个显示屏为第二屏幕。由于电子设备的显示屏幕需要显示画面，以供用户观看，因此，折叠屏中的显示屏幕通常为朝向用户的显示屏，相应的，另一显示屏作为所述第二屏幕。也就是说，所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏中，未朝向用户的显示屏属于所述第二屏幕。据此，电子设备可通过多种方式确定所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏中的第二屏幕。
在其中一种可行的实现方式中，当所述电子设备应用折叠屏，所述折叠屏包括的第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角小于角度阈值时，在根据所述第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势之前，还包括以下步骤：
当所述第一显示屏中设置有红外传感器时，确定所述第一显示屏中设置的红外传感器是否检测到人体辐射的红外信号；
当所述第一显示屏中设置的红外传感器检测到所述红外信号时，确定所述第二显示屏属于所述第二屏幕。
在上述方案中，当第一显示屏中设置的红外传感器检测到人体辐射的红外信号，则表明第一显示屏朝向用户，这种情况下，则可确定第一显示屏为显示屏幕，相应的所述第二显示屏为第二屏幕。
进一步的，当所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏中均设置有红外传感器时，电子设备还可以分别确定第一显示屏中设置的红外传感器以及第二显示屏中设置的红外传感器是否检测到人体辐射的红外信号，并确定未检测到人体辐射的红外信号的红外传感器对应的显示屏属于第二屏幕。
在另外一种可行的实现方式中，当所述电子设备应用折叠屏，所述折叠屏包括的第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角小于角度阈值时，在根据所述第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势之前，还包括以下步骤：
当所述第一显示屏中设置有相机时，确定所述第一显示屏中设置的相机是否拍摄到人脸图像；
当所述第一显示屏中设置的相机拍摄到人脸图像时，确定所述第二显示屏属于所述第二屏幕。
在上述方案中，当第一显示屏中设置的相机拍摄到人脸图像时，则表明第一显示屏朝向用户，这种情况下，则可确定第一显示屏为显示屏幕，相应的所述第二显示屏属于所述第二屏幕。
进一步的，当所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏中均设置有相机时，电子设备还可以分别确定第一显示屏中设置的相机以及第二显示屏中设置的相机是否拍摄到人脸图像，并确定未拍摄到人脸图像的相机所对应的显示屏属于第二屏幕。
在另外一种可行的实现方式中，当所述电子设备应用折叠屏，所述折叠屏包括的第一显示屏和第二显示屏之间的夹角小于角度阈值时，在根据所述第一区域在所述第二屏幕的位置，确定所述电子设备被抓握的手势之前，还包括以下步骤：
当所述第一显示屏中设置有接近光传感器时，确定所述第一显示屏中设置的接近光传感器检测到的环境光是否在预设的光强范围内；
当所述第一显示屏中设置的接近光传感器检测到的环境光在预设的光强范围内时，确定所述第二显示屏属于所述第二屏幕。
用户在应用电子设备的过程中，往往会对朝向自己的显示屏造成遮挡，从而导致朝向自己的显示屏接收到的环境光的光强减弱。在本申请实施例中，可预先通过多次试验，确定当用户应用电子设备的过程中，显示屏幕中设置的接近光传感器检测到的环境光的第一强度，并据此设置包括所述第一强度的光强范围。
这种情况下，当所述第一显示屏中设置的接近光传感器检测到的环境光在预设的光强范围内时，则表明第一显示屏朝向用户，这种情况下，则可确定第一显示屏为显示屏幕，相应的所述第二显示屏属于所述第二屏幕。
进一步的，当所述第一显示屏和第二显示屏中均设置有接近光传感器时，电子设备还可以分别确定第一显示屏中设置的接近光传感器以及第二显示屏中设置的接近光传感器检测到的环境光是否在所述预设的光强范围内，并确定未在所述预设的光强范围内的接近光传感器所对应的显示屏属于第二屏幕。
上述实施例中，分别公开了根据红外传感器、相机和接近光传感器，确定属于第二屏幕的显示屏的方法。当然，电子设备还可以通过其他方式确定折叠屏中未朝向用户的显示屏，并确定该显示屏属于所述第二屏幕，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
进一步的，在本申请实施例中，在根据所述电子设备被抓握的手势，调整所述触控区域在所述第二屏幕中的位置之后，还包括：
当所述第一区域的面积减小时，将所述触控区域调整至初始位置。其中，所述初始位置为在根据所述电子设备被抓握的手势，调整所述触控区域在所述第二屏幕中的位置之前，所述触控区域所处的位置。
其中，当所述第一区域的面积减小时，表明用户将不再抓握电子设备，从而可将触控区域调整至初始位置。这种情况下，由于用户将不再抓握电子设备，因此，即使触控区域被调整至初始位置，也不会对第二屏幕的触控区域造成误触。并且，当触控区域处于初始位置时，往往更贴近用户的使用习惯，从而便于用户的使用，提高用户的使用体验。
下面结合附图对本申请实施例提供的触控区域调整方法进行介绍。
首先，对本申请实施例提供的侧边屏幕的信息交互方式进行介绍。
在本申请的一些实施例中，侧边屏幕可以接收用户的触控操作，电子设备响应于检测到的触控操作，可以控制电子设备的其他屏幕上的显示内容，也可以实现对电子设备功能参数(例如，显示亮度、蓝牙的开启和关闭、闪光灯的开启和关闭)的调整。触摸操作1可以为单击、双击、长按、滑动等操作。
在一种实现方式中，电子设备的侧边屏幕显示有控件，电子设备检测到作用于上述控件的触控操作1，响应于上述触控操作1，启动该触控操作1触发的功能1。
示例性的，如图29所示，以图7C所示的配置折叠屏的电子设备为例，侧边屏幕显示 有控件框201，控件框201包括备忘录图标201A、语音助手图标201B、截屏图标201C。
其中，备忘录图标201A可以接收用户的触控操作(例如单击操作)，响应于上述触控操作，电子设备可以显示备忘录界面。
智能助手图标201B可以接收用户的触控操作(例如单击操作)，响应于上述触控操作，电子设备可以启动语音助手。
截屏图标201C可以接收用户的触控操作(例如单击操作)，响应于上述触控操作，电子设备可以截取显示屏194当前显示的界面并保存。
在另一种实现方式中，电子设备的侧边屏幕没有显示控件，电子设备可以基于触控操作2在侧边屏幕的触控轨迹、触控时长等，识别触摸操作2，从而确定并启动该触摸操作2触发的功能2。
示例性的，如图30A和图30B所示，以图5B所示的配置曲面屏的电子设备为例，用户双击电子设备的侧边屏幕23，电子设备响应于检测到的上述用户操作，显示音量调整框202。音量调整框202可以包括音量调整条202A、音量类型202B和音量设置控件202C。
其中，音量类型202B用于表征音量调整条202A对应的音量类型，例如铃声、闹钟、媒体等。音量调整条202A中的阴影部分的长度用于表征音量类型202B当前的音量。
音量设置控件202C可接收触控操作(例如单击操作)，响应于上述用户操作，电子设备可以显示音量的设置界面。示例性的，如图30C和图30D所示，用户的手指在侧边屏幕23上向上滑动，电子设备响应于检测到的上述用户操作，基于用户滑动的距离增大铃声的音量，以及音量调整条中阴影部分的长度。
不限于前述实施例提供的音量控制、截屏、语音助手、备忘录等功能，作用于侧边屏幕的触控操作所触发的功能还可以包括拍照、电话接听、录屏、及快捷支付等功能。本申请实施例中，上述触控操作与该触控操作触发的功能的对应关系可以有多种确定方式，例如，上述对应关系可以是电子设备出厂时默认设置的，还可以是用户自定义设置的，还可以是电子设备根据当前运行的应用程序确定的，还可以是电子设备根据用户对应用功能的使用频率确定的，此处具体不做限定。
然后，下面介绍如何基于用户握持电子设备的接触面确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域。
用户握持电子设备的握持状态有多种，主要可以包括纵向握持状态和横向握持状态。其中，纵向握持状态是指用户主要通过抓握电子设备的长边对应的侧面来握持电子设备，电子设备的长边对应的侧面可以配置有侧边屏幕。横向握持状态是指用户主要通过抓握电子设备的短边对应的侧面来握持电子设备。纵向握持状态可以包括左手纵向握持状态、右手纵向握持、双手纵向握持等；横向握持状态可以包括左手横向握持、右手横向握持、双手横向握持等。
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备未检测到握持侧边屏幕的触摸输入时，电子设备可以确定该侧边屏幕全部为可触控区域，即电子设备可以响应于针对侧边屏幕的触摸输入，并执行该触摸输入对应的功能。示例性的，如图30A和图30B所示，响应于针对侧边屏幕23的双击操作，电子设备可以显示音量调整框202。
下面先具体介绍本申请实施例涉及的几种握持状态。
1、左手纵向握持。
示例性的，如图31A所示，是本申请实施例提供的一种左手纵向握持电子设备的示意图。
针对两侧均配置侧边屏幕的电子设备，图31B示出了左手单手纵向握持状态的接触面示意图。如图31B所示，电子设备包括侧边屏幕1和侧边屏幕2，用户与显示屏194的接触区域，可以包括：手掌的大鱼际在侧边屏幕1形成的大鱼际接触面301，用户的其他手指(即除大拇指以外的手指)在侧边屏幕2形成的接触面集合302。在一些实施例中，左手纵向握持状态下，用户与显示屏194的接触区域还可以包括：用户的大拇指在侧边屏幕1形成的手指搭握接触面303。
其中，左手纵向握持状态下，与侧边屏幕2接触的用户的其他手指(即除大拇指以外的手指)可以包括食指、中指、无名指和小指这四个手指中的一或多个。例如，如图31B所示，与侧边屏幕1接触的其他手指包括上述4个手指，接触面集合302包括与上述四个手指分别对应的手指抓握接触面302A、手指抓握接触面302B、手指抓握接触面集合302C、手指抓握接触面302D。
由图31B可知，接触面集合302中的接触面沿电子设备的长边依次排列。在本申请的一些实施例中，接触面集合302中的两个相邻接触面的最大距离小于距离阈值1。
针对仅一侧配置侧边屏幕的电子设备，图31C示出了左手纵向握持状态的接触面示意图。如图31C所示，电子设备包括侧边屏幕1，用户与显示屏194的接触区域可以包括大鱼际接触面301，还可以包括手指搭握接触面303。
本申请实施例中，基于用户握持电子设备时与侧边屏幕形成的接触面可以被称为侧边接触面。图31B示出的大鱼际接触面301、手指抓握接触面302A、手指抓握接触面302B、手指抓握接触面302C、手指抓握接触面302D、手指搭握接触面303均为侧边接触面。侧边屏幕包括侧边接触面的部分或全部，例如，侧边屏幕1包括大鱼际接触面301的全部，侧边屏幕2包括手指抓握接触面302B的全部。
需要说明的时，用户握持电子设备形成的手指搭握接触面302D和用户正常触控操作(例如单击、双击)形成手指点击接触面的特征不同。通常，用户握持电子设备形成的手指搭握接触面的触摸面积更大，且触摸时长更长。
2、右手纵向握持。
示例性的，如图32A所示，是本申请实施例提供的一种右手纵向握持电子设备的示意图。针对两侧均配置侧边屏幕的电子设备，图32B示出了图32A对应的接触面示意图。如图32B所示的接触面示意图，右手单手纵向握持电子设备时，用户与显示屏194的接触区域，可以包括：侧边屏幕2与手掌的大鱼际形成的大鱼际接触面401，用户的其他手指与侧边屏幕1形成的接触面集合402。在一些实施例中，右手纵向握持状态下，用户与显示屏194的接触区域还可以包括：侧边屏幕2与大拇指形成的手指搭握接触面403。
类似的，右手纵向握持状态下，与侧边屏幕2接触的用户的其他手指可以包括食指、中指、无名指和小指这四个手指中的一或多个。例如，如图32B所示，抓握侧边屏幕1的其他手指包括3个手指，接触面集合402包括与上述三个手指分别对应的手指抓握接触面402A、手指抓握接触面402B、手指抓握接触面402D。
可以理解，用户右手纵向握持电子设备时，用户的大拇指也可以不与侧边屏幕2接触。
针对仅一侧配置侧边屏幕的电子设备，图32C示出了右手纵向握持状态的接触面示意图。如图32C所示，电子设备包括侧边屏幕1，用户与显示屏194的接触区域可以包括接触面集合402。
3、双手纵向握持。
示例性的，如图33A所示，是本申请实施例提供的一种双手纵向握持电子设备的示意图，针对两侧均配置侧边屏幕的电子设备，图33B示出了图33A对应的接触面示意图。双手纵向握持电子设备时，用户与显示屏194的侧边屏幕的接触区域，可以包括：侧边屏幕1与手掌的大鱼际形成的大鱼际接触面501，侧边屏幕2与手掌的大鱼际形成的大鱼际接触面502。在一些实施例中，双手纵向握持状态下，用户与显示屏194的接触区域还可以包括：侧边屏幕1与大拇指形成的手指搭握接触面503，侧边屏幕2与大拇指形成的手指搭握接触面504。
可以理解，用户双手纵向握持电子设备时，用户双手的大拇指也可以不与侧边屏幕1和/或侧边屏幕2接触。
针对仅一侧配置侧边屏幕的电子设备，双手纵向握持状态的接触面可以参考图31C。
4、左手横向握持。
示例性的，如图34A所示，是本申请实施例提供的一种左手横向握持电子设备的示意图，针对两侧均配置侧边屏幕的电子设备，图34B示出了图34A对应的接触面示意图。左手单手横向握持电子设备时，用户与显示屏194的接触区域，可以包括：侧边屏幕1的左端与用户手指形成的手指搭握接触面601，侧边屏幕2的左端与虎口形成的虎口接触面602。其中，侧边屏幕1位于侧边屏幕2的上方。
针对仅一侧配置侧边屏幕的电子设备，图34C和图34D示出了左手横向握持状态的接触面示意图。如图34C所示，侧边屏幕1位于电子设备其他屏幕的上方，用户与显示屏194的接触区域可以包括侧边屏幕1的左端与用户手指形成的手指搭握接触面601。如图34D所示，侧边屏幕1位于电子设备其他屏幕的下方，用户与显示屏194的接触区域可以包括侧边屏幕1的左端与虎口形成的虎口接触面602。
可以理解，图34B至图34D所示的手指搭握接触面和虎口接触面均为侧边接触面。
5、右手横向握持。
示例性的，如图35A所示，是本申请实施例提供的一种右手横向握持电子设备的示意图，针对两侧均配置侧边屏幕的电子设备，图35B示出了图35A对应的接触面示意图。右手单手横向握持电子设备时，用户与显示屏194的接触区域，可以包括：侧边屏幕1的右端与用户手指形成的手指搭握接触面603，侧边屏幕2的右端与虎口形成的虎口接触面604。其中，侧边屏幕1位于侧边屏幕2的上方。
针对仅一侧配置侧边屏幕的电子设备，图35C和图35D示出了右手横向握持状态的接触面示意图。如图35C所示，侧边屏幕1位于电子设备其他屏幕的上方，用户与显示屏194的接触区域可以包括侧边屏幕1的右端与用户手指形成的手指搭握接触面603。如图35D所示，侧边屏幕1位于电子设备其他屏幕的下方，用户与显示屏194的接触区域可以包括侧边屏幕1的右端与虎口形成的虎口接触面604。
6、双手横向握持。
示例性的，如图36A所示，是本申请实施例提供的一种双手横向握持电子设备的示意图，针对两侧均配置侧边屏幕的电子设备，图36B示出了图36A对应的接触面示意图。双手横向握持电子设备时，用户与显示屏194的接触区域，可以包括：侧边屏幕1的左端与用户手指形成的手指搭握接触面701，侧边屏幕2的左端与虎口形成的虎口接触面702；侧边屏幕1的右端与用户手指形成的手指搭握接触面703，侧边屏幕2的右端与虎口形成的虎口接触面704。其中，侧边屏幕1位于侧边屏幕2的上方。
针对仅一侧配置侧边屏幕的电子设备，图36C和图36D示出了双手横向握持状态的接触面示意图。如图36C所示，侧边屏幕1位于电子设备其他屏幕的上方，用户与显示屏194的接触区域可以包括：侧边屏幕1的左端与用户手指形成的手指搭握接触面701，以及侧边屏幕1的右端与用户手指形成的手指搭握接触面703。如图36D所示，侧边屏幕1位于电子设备其他屏幕的下方，用户与显示屏194的接触区域可以包括：侧边屏幕2的左端与虎口形成的虎口接触面702，以及侧边屏幕1的右端与虎口形成的虎口接触面704。
图31A至图36C中所示的包括2个侧边屏幕的电子设备可以是图5A中配置曲面屏的电子设备，也可以是图6A中配置环绕屏的电子设备。图31A至图36C中所示的包括1个侧边屏幕的电子设备可以是图7A中配置折叠屏的电子设备，侧边屏幕1可以是图7A中的侧边屏幕53。
由图31A至图33B可知，针对配置两个侧边屏幕的电子设备，用户纵向握持电子设备时，至少有一个侧边屏幕与手掌的大鱼际有接触面。用户单手纵向握持电子设备时，有一个侧边屏幕与手掌的大鱼际有接触面，有一个侧边屏幕与用户的除大拇指以外的手指中的一或多个手指有接触面；用户双手纵向握持电子设备时，两个侧边屏幕均与手掌的大鱼际有接触面。
由图34A至图36D可知，用户横向握持电子设备时，用户与侧边屏幕的接触面位于侧边屏幕的一端或两端。针对配置两个侧边屏幕的电子设备，用户单手横向握持电子设备时，两个侧边屏幕的同一端各有一个接触面，分别是手指搭握接触面和虎口接触面；用户双手横向握持电子设备时，位于上方的侧边屏幕的两端是两个手指搭握接触面，位于下方的侧边屏幕的两端是两个虎口接触面。针对配置1个侧边屏幕的电子设备，用户单手横向握持电子设备时，侧边屏幕位于上方时，侧边屏幕的一端有一个手指接触面，侧边屏幕位于下方时，侧边屏幕的一端有一个虎口接触面。在一些实施例中，用户双手横向握持电子设备时，一个侧边屏幕的两端的接触面的距离通常大于距离阈值1。
本申请实施例中，电子设备可以利用加速传感器和/或陀螺仪传感器获取电子设备的横竖屏状态，从而确定电子设备是竖屏状态还是横屏状态，以及侧边屏幕1和侧边屏幕2的位置关系，例如侧边屏幕1位于侧边屏幕2的上方。
在一些实施例中，接触面位于侧边屏幕可以指该接触面的部分或全部位于上述侧边屏幕。
需要说明的是，图31A至图36D所示的握持状态，是本申请实施例提供的各类握持状态的示例性说明，对本申请实施例不构成限定。除图31A至图36D所示的握持状态，本申请实施例还可以包括其他握持状态，此处不做具体限定。
二、基于用户握持电子设备的接触面的特征，下面具体介绍如何基于用户握持电子设备的接触面确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域。
在本申请的一些实施例中，接触面的触控信息可以包括接触面的位置、沿电子设备长边的高度、沿电子设备长边的宽度、接触面的面积、接触面的电容信息、接触面的触摸时长等信息中的一或多个。其中，接触面的电容信息可以包括接触面对应的触控阵列中每个坐标点的电容信号，例如，每个坐标点的电容变化量。接触面的触控信息还可以包括其他参数，此处不做具体限定。
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备可以基于侧边接触面的触控信息确定接触面的类型。用户握持电子设备形成的侧边接触面的类型可以包括：大鱼际接触面、手指抓握接触面、手指搭握接触面、虎口接触面等。
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备可以基于侧边接触面在侧边屏幕中的位置以及侧边接触面的触控信息，自适应的调整侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域。本申请实施例中，确定侧边屏幕上的触控区域和非触控区域的具体实现方式可以包括但不限于如下两种实现方式。
在实现方式1中，电子设备可以基于一个侧边屏幕中的侧边接触面的位置以及侧边接触面的触控信息，确定该侧边屏幕中的触控区域和非触控区域。
在实现方式2中，电子设备可以基于一或两个侧边屏幕中的侧边接触面的位置以及侧边接触面的位置，确定用户的握持状态，进而确定该握持状态下电子设备的两个侧边屏幕中的触控区域和非触控区域。
在实现方式3中，针对图6A所示的环绕屏和图7A所示的折叠屏，用户纵向抓握电子设备时，用户手掌的抓握面也包括显示屏幕，即背面屏幕。电子设备可以用户手掌与背面屏幕的接触面的触控信息，确定电子设备的两个侧边屏幕中的触控区域和非触控区域。
在实现方式1中，确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域的具体可以包括但不限于情况1至情况6。
情况1：
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备基于侧边接触面的触控信息确定侧边屏幕的侧边接触面包括大鱼际接触面，电子设备基于该大鱼际接触面的位置确定该侧边屏幕中触控区域和非触控区域的位置。
示例性的，如图37A至图37D所示，电子设备确定侧边屏幕1的侧边接触面包括大鱼际接触面301。在一些实施例中，如图37A和图37C所示，当大鱼际接触面301与侧边屏幕1的顶端的最短距离大于等于L1时，则电子设备确定侧边屏幕1的触控区域1位于侧边屏幕1的顶端和大鱼际接触面301之间，侧边屏幕1中除触控区域1之外的区域为非触控区域1。如图37B和图37D所示，当大鱼际接触面301与侧边屏幕1的顶端的最短距离小于L1时，则电子设备确定侧边屏幕1均为非触控区域1。其中，图37A和图37C中的触控区域1与大鱼际接触面301的最短距离等于距离1。在一些实施例中，触控区域1与侧边屏幕1的顶端的最短距离为距离2。
例如，L1等于显示屏长边的长度的一半；距离1可以等于5个坐标点的高度；距离2 等于0或者3个坐标点的高度。
参考图8B，本申请实施例中，坐标点的高度指触摸传感器50的触控屏阵列中一个网格沿电子设备长边的高度，坐标点的宽度指上述一个网格沿电子设备短边的宽度。
类似的，如图31B所示的右手纵向握持状态，图32B所示的双手纵向握持状态，以及图30C所示的只有一个侧边屏幕的电子设备，当侧边屏幕包括大鱼际接触面时，也可以通过上述实施方式确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域，此处不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，电子设备确定电子设备处于横屏状态，当大鱼际接触面301与侧边屏幕2的顶端(或底端)的最短距离大于等于L1时，电子设备确定侧边屏幕1的触控区域1位于侧边屏幕的顶端(或底端)和大鱼际接触面301之间，侧边屏幕1中除触控区域1之外的区域为非触控区域1。当大鱼际接触面301与侧边屏幕的顶端和底端的最短距离均小于L2时，则电子设备确定侧边屏幕1均为非触控区域1。其中，触控区域1与大鱼际接触面301的最短距离等于距离1。在一些实施例中，触控区域1与侧边屏幕的顶端(或底端)的最短距离为距离2。
在一些实施例中，电子设备处于横屏状态，侧边屏幕1位于其他屏幕的下方时，侧边屏幕1均为非触控区域1。
需要说明的是，如图37A所示，侧边屏幕1的顶端是指侧边屏幕1的顶部边界线，侧边屏幕1的底端是指侧边屏幕1的底部边界线。本申请实施例中，接触面与侧边屏幕1的顶端的距离可以指接触面与侧边屏幕1的顶部边界线的最短距离；接触面与侧边屏幕1的底端的距离可以指接触面与侧边屏幕1的底部边界线的最短距离。在一种实现方式中，侧边屏幕1的顶部边界线与正面屏幕的顶部边界线的延长线重合，侧边屏幕1的底部边界线与正面屏幕的底部边界线的延长线重合。
情况2：
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备基于侧边接触面的触控信息确定侧边屏幕的侧边接触面包括接触面集合。电子设备基于该接触面集合的位置确定该侧边屏幕中触控区域和非触控区域的位置。
示例性的，如图37A至图37D所示，电子设备确定侧边屏幕2的侧边接触面包括接触面集合302。其中，接触面集合302包括至少4个手指抓握接触面，任意两个相邻接触面的最小距离小于距离阈值1。在一些实施例中，如图37A和图37B所示，当接触面集合302与侧边屏幕2的顶端的最短距离大于等于L2时，则电子设备确定侧边屏幕2的触控区域2位于侧边屏幕2的顶端和接触面集合302之间，侧边屏幕2中除触控区域2之外的区域为非触控区域2。如图37C和图37D所示，当接触面集合302与侧边屏幕2的顶端的最短距离小于L2时，则电子设备确定侧边屏幕2均为非触控区域2。其中，图37A和图37B中的触控区域2与接触面集合302的最短距离等于距离3。在一些实施例中，触控区域2与侧边屏幕2的顶端的最短距离为距离4。
例如，L2等于显示屏长边的长度的一半；距离3可以等于5个坐标点的高度；距离4等于0或者3个坐标点的高度。
类似的，如图31B所示的右手纵向握持状态，以及图31C所示的只有一个侧边屏幕的电子设备，当侧边屏幕包括接触面集合302时，也可以通过上述实施方式确定侧边屏幕的 触控区域和非触控区域，此处不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，电子设备确定处于电子设备横屏状态，当接触面集合302与侧边屏幕2的顶端(或底端)的最短距离大于等于L2时，则电子设备确定侧边屏幕2的触控区域2位于侧边屏幕的顶端(或底端)和接触面集合302之间，侧边屏幕2中除触控区域2之外的区域为非触控区域2。当接触面集合302与侧边屏幕2的顶端和底端的最短距离均小于L2时，则电子设备确定侧边屏幕2均为非触控区域2。其中，触控区域2与接触面集合302的最短距离等于距离3。在一些实施例中，触控区域2与侧边屏幕2的顶端(或底端)的最短距离为距离4。
在一些实施例中，电子设备处于横屏状态，侧边屏幕2位于其他屏幕的下方时，侧边屏幕2均为非触控区域2。
情况3：
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备基于侧边接触面的触控信息确定侧边屏幕的侧边接触面包括手指搭握接触面，且该手指搭握接触面与侧边屏幕的一端的距离大于等于L5时，电子设备基于该手指搭握接触面的位置，确定该侧边屏幕中触控区域的位于侧边屏幕的这一端和该手指搭握接触面之间。
示例性的，如图38A所示的配置两个侧边屏幕的电子设备和图38B所示的配置一个侧边屏幕的电子设备，当侧边屏幕1的包括手指搭握接触面601，且手指搭握接触面601与侧边屏幕1的右端的顶端的距离大于等于L5时，电子设备确定侧边屏幕1的触控区域1位于侧边屏幕的右端和手指搭握接触面601之间。其中，触控区域1与手指搭握接触面601的最短距离等于距离7。在一些实施例中，触控区域1与侧边屏幕的右端顶端的最短距离等于距离8。
情况4：
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备基于侧边接触面的触控信息确定侧边屏幕的侧边接触面包括虎口接触面，且该虎口接触面与侧边屏幕的一端的距离大于等于L6时，电子设备基于该虎口接触面的位置，确定该侧边屏幕中触控区域的位于侧边屏幕的这一端和该虎口接触面之间。
示例性的，如图38A所示的配置两个侧边屏幕的电子设备，当侧边屏幕2的左端包括虎口接触面602，且虎口接触面602与侧边屏幕2的右端的顶端的距离大于等于L6时，电子设备确定侧边屏幕2的触控区域2位于侧边屏幕的右端和虎口接触面602之间。其中，触控区域2与虎口接触面602的最短距离等于距离9。在一些实施例中，触控区域1与边屏幕的右端顶端的最短距离等于距离10。
类似的，图38C所示的只有一个侧边屏幕的电子设备，也可以通过上述实施方式确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域，此处不再赘述。
情况5：
在本申请的一些实施例中，侧边屏幕包括两个手指搭握接触面，其中，两个手指搭握接触面的最短距离大于等于L7时，电子设备确定该侧边屏幕的触控区域位于两个手指搭握接触面之间。
示例性的，参考图39A至图39D，侧边屏幕1的左端包括手指搭握接触面701，右端 包括手指搭握接触面703。如图39A所示的配置两个侧边屏幕的电子设备和图39B所示的配置一个侧边屏幕的电子设备，当手指搭握接触面701和手指搭握接触面703的最短距离大于等于L7时，电子设备确定侧边屏幕1的触控区域1位于手指搭握接触面701和手指搭握接触面703之间。如图39C所示的配置两个侧边屏幕的电子设备和图39D所示的配置一个侧边屏幕的电子设备，当手指搭握接触面701和手指搭握接触面703的最短距离小于L7时，电子设备确定侧边屏幕1均为非触控区域1。其中，触控区域1与手指搭握接触面701的最短距离等于距离7，触控区域1与手指搭握接触面703的最短距离也为距离7。
情况6：
在本申请的一些实施例中，侧边屏幕包括两个虎口接触面，其中，两个虎口接触面的最短距离大于等于L8时，电子设备确定该侧边屏幕的触控区域位于两个虎口接触面之间。
示例性的，参考图39A至图39G，侧边屏幕2的左端包括虎口接触面702，右端包括虎口接触面704。如图39A所示的配置两个侧边屏幕的电子设备，当虎口接触面702和虎口接触面704与侧边屏幕2最短距离大于等于L8时，电子设备确定侧边屏幕2的触控区域2位于虎口接触面702和虎口接触面704之间。如图39F所示的配置两个侧边屏幕的电子设备，当虎口接触面702和虎口接触面704与侧边屏幕2最短距离小于8时，电子设备确定侧边屏幕2均为非控区域2。其中，触控区域2与虎口接触面702的最短距离等于距离9，触控区域1与虎口接触面704的最短距离也为距离9。
类似的，图39E所示的只有一个侧边屏幕的电子设备，也可以通过上述实施方式确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域，此处不再赘述。
在本申请的一些实施例中，如图39G所示，电子设备确定一个侧边屏幕的包括两个虎口接触面，电子设备确定该侧边屏幕均为非触控区域。
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备确定电子设备处于横屏状态，且一个侧边屏幕的包括两个虎口接触面，电子设备确定该侧边屏幕均为非触控区域。
在实现方式2中，确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域的具体可以包括但不限于情况7至情况12。
情况7：
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备包括两个侧边屏幕，当一个侧边屏幕的侧边接触面包括大鱼际接触面，另一个侧边屏幕的侧边接触面包括接触面集合时，电子设备确定用户单手纵向握持电子设备。然后，电子设备基于大鱼际接触面和接触面集合在侧边屏幕的位置，确定各侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域。
示例性的，如图37A至图37D所示，电子设备包括侧边屏幕1和侧边屏幕2，当侧边屏幕1的侧边接触面包括大鱼际接触面301，侧边屏幕2的侧边接触面包括接触面集合302时，电子设备确定用户左手纵向握持电子设备。然后，电子设备基于大鱼际接触面301和接触面集合302在侧边屏幕的位置，确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域。
示例性的，在一些实施例中，如图37A所示，当大鱼际接触面301与侧边屏幕1的顶端的最短距离大于等于L1，接触面集合302与侧边屏幕2的顶端的最短距离大于等于L2时，则电子设备确定侧边屏幕1的触控区域1位于侧边屏幕1的顶端和大鱼际接触面301之间，侧边屏幕2的触控区域2位于侧边屏幕1的顶端和接触面集合302之间。如图37B 所示，当大鱼际接触面301与侧边屏幕1的顶端的最短距离小于L1，接触面集合302与侧边屏幕2的顶端的最短距离大于等于L2时，则电子设备确定侧边屏幕1均为非触控区域1，侧边屏幕2的触控区域2位于侧边屏幕2的顶端和接触面集合302之间。如图37C所示，当大鱼际接触面301与侧边屏幕1的顶端的最短距离大于等于L1，接触面集合302与侧边屏幕2的顶端的最短距离小于L2时，则电子设备确定侧边屏幕1的触控区域1位于侧边屏幕1的顶端和大鱼际接触面301之间，侧边屏幕2均为非触控区域。如图37D所示，当大鱼际接触面301与侧边屏幕1的顶端的最短距离小于L1，接触面集合302与侧边屏幕2的顶端的最短距离小于L2时，则电子设备确定侧边屏幕1均为非触控区域1，侧边屏幕2均为非触控区域2。其中，如图37A至图37D所示，当侧边屏幕1存在触控区域1时，触控区域1与大鱼际接触面301的最短距离等于距离1。当侧边屏幕2存在触控区域2时，触控区域2与接触面集合302的最短距离等于距离3。在一些实施例中，触控区域1与侧边屏幕的顶端的最短距离为距离2，触控区域2与侧边屏幕的顶端的最短距离为距离4。
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备确定侧边屏幕1的侧边接触面包括大鱼际接触面，侧边屏幕2的侧边接触面包括手指抓握接触面的接触面集合时，电子设备确定用户右手纵向握持电子设备。然后，电子设备基于大鱼际接触面和接触面集合在侧边屏幕的位置，确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域。类似的，右手纵向握持状态下，如何确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域可以参考左手纵向握持的相关实施例，此处不再赘述。
情况8：
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备包括两个侧边屏幕，当两个侧边屏幕的侧边接触面均包括大鱼际接触面时，电子设备确定用户双手纵向握持电子设备。然后，电子设备基于各侧边屏幕的大鱼际接触面的位置，确定该侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域。
示例性，如图40A至图40D所示，电子设备确定侧边屏幕1的侧边接触面包括大鱼际接触面501，侧边屏幕2的侧边接触面也包括大鱼际接触面502时，电子设备确定用户双手纵向握持电子设备。然后，电子设备基于大鱼际接触面501和大鱼际接触面502在侧边屏幕的位置，确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域。
如图40A所示，当大鱼际接触501与侧边屏幕1的顶端的最短距离大于等于L1，大鱼际接触502与侧边屏幕2的顶端的最短距离也大于等于L1时，则电子设备确定侧边屏幕1的触控区域1位于侧边屏幕1的顶端和大鱼际接触面501之间，触控区域2位于侧边屏幕2的顶端和大鱼际接触面502之间。如图40B所示，当大鱼际接触面501与侧边屏幕1的顶端的最短距离小于L1，且大鱼际接触502与侧边屏幕2的顶端的最短距离大于等于L1时，则电子设备确定侧边屏幕1均为非触控区域1，侧边屏幕2的触控区域2位于侧边屏幕2的顶端和大鱼际接触面502之间。如图40C所示，当大鱼际接触面301与侧边屏幕1的顶端的最短距离大于等于L1，且大鱼际接触502与侧边屏幕2的顶端的最短距离小于L1时，则电子设备确定侧边屏幕1的触控区域1位于侧边屏幕1的顶端和大鱼际接触面301之间，侧边屏幕2均为非触控区域。如图40D所示，当大鱼际接触面301与侧边屏幕1的顶端的最短距离小于L1，且大鱼际接触502与侧边屏幕2的顶端的最短距离也小于L1时，则电子设备确定侧边屏幕1均为非触控区域1，侧边屏幕2均为非触控区域2。其中，如图40A至图40D所示，当侧边屏幕1存在触控区域1时，触控区域1与大鱼际接触面501的 最短距离等于距离1，当侧边屏幕2存在触控区域2时，触控区域1与大鱼际接触面502的最短距离等于距离1。在一些实施例中，触控区域1与侧边屏幕的顶端的距离为距离2，触控区域2与侧边屏幕的顶端的距离为距离2。
情况9：
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备包括两个侧边屏幕，电子设备确定一个侧边屏幕的侧边接触面包括手指搭握接触面，另一个侧边屏幕的侧边接触面包括虎口接触面，手指搭握接触面与侧边屏幕的一端的顶端的距离大于等于L5，且虎口接触面与另一个侧边屏幕的同一端的顶端的距离大于等于L6，电子设备确定用户单手横向握持电子设备。电子设备基于手指搭握接触面和虎口接触面的位置确定各侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域。
在本申请的一些实施例中，示例性的，如图38A所示，电子设备确定侧边屏幕1的侧边接触面仅包括手指搭握接触面601，侧边屏幕2的侧边接触面仅包括虎口接触面602，手指搭握接触面601与侧边屏幕1的右端的顶端的距离大于等于L5，且虎口接触面602与侧边屏幕2的右端的顶端的距离大于等于L6，电子设备确定用户左横向握持电子设备。电子设备确定侧边屏幕1的触控区域1位于侧边屏幕1的右端和手指搭握接触面601之间，确定侧边屏幕2的触控区域2位于侧边屏幕2的右端和虎口接触面602之间。其中，触控区域1与手指搭握接触面601的最短距离等于距离7，触控区域2与虎口接触面602的最短距离等于距离9。
在一些实施例中，电子设备确定电子设备处于横屏状态，侧边屏幕1位于侧边屏幕2的上方，侧边屏幕1的侧边接触面仅包括手指搭握接触面601，侧边屏幕2的侧边接触面仅包括虎口接触面602，手指搭握接触面601与侧边屏幕1的右端的顶端的距离大于等于L5，且虎口接触面602与侧边屏幕2的右端的顶端的距离大于等于L6时，电子设备确定用户左手横向握持电子设备。电子设备确定侧边屏幕1的触控区域1位于侧边屏幕1的右端和手指搭握接触面601之间，确定侧边屏幕2均为非触控区域2。其中，触控区域1与手指搭握接触面601的最短距离等于距离7。
情况10：
在本申请的一些实施例中，侧边屏幕包括两个手指搭握接触面，其中，一个手指搭握接触面与侧边屏幕的一端的顶端的距离小于距离阈值2时，另一个手指搭握接触面与侧边屏幕的另一端的顶端的距离也小于距离阈值2时，电子设备确定用户双手横向握持电子设备。然后，电子设备基于手指搭握接触面的位置确定该侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域。
示例性的，参考图39A至图39D，侧边屏幕1的左端包括手指搭握接触面701，右端包括手指搭握接触面703，当手指搭握接触面701与侧边屏幕1的左端的顶端的距离小于距离阈值2时，且手指搭握接触面703与侧边屏幕1的右端的顶端的距离小于距离阈值2时，电子设备确定用户双手横向握持电子设备。然后，如图39A和图39B所示，当指点击接触面701和手指搭握接触面703的最短距离大于等于L7时，电子设备确定侧边屏幕1的触控区域1位于手指搭握接触面701和手指搭握接触面703之间。如图39C和图39D所示，当手指搭握接触面701和手指搭握接触面703的最短距离小于L7时，电子设备确定侧边屏幕1均为非触控区域1。其中，触控区域1与手指搭握接触面701的最短距离等于距离7，触控区域1与手指搭握接触面703的最短距离也为距离7。
在一些实施例中，电子设备确定电子设备处于横屏状态，侧边屏幕1包括手指搭握接触面701和包括手指搭握接触面703，手指搭握接触面701与侧边屏幕1的左端的顶端的距离小于距离阈值2时，且手指搭握接触面703与侧边屏幕1的右端的顶端的距离小于距离阈值2时，电子设备确定用户双手横向握持电子设备。然后，电子设备基于手指搭握接触面的位置确定该侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域。具体的，可以参考上述实施例。此处不再赘述。
情况11：
在本申请的一些实施例中，侧边屏幕包括两个虎口接触面，其中，一个虎口接触面与侧边屏幕的一端的顶端的距离小于距离阈值3时，另一个虎口接触面与侧边屏幕的另一端的顶端的距离也小于距离阈值3时，电子设备确定用户双手横向握持电子设备。然后，电子设备基于虎口接触面的位置，确定该侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域。
示例性的，参考图39A至图39D，侧边屏幕2的左端包括虎口接触面702，右端包括虎口接触面704。当虎口接触面702与侧边屏幕2的左端的顶端的距离小于距离阈值3时，且虎口接触面704与侧边屏幕2的右端的顶端的距离小于距离阈值3时，电子设备确定用户双手横向握持电子设备。然后，如图39A和图39E所示，当虎口接触面702和虎口接触面704与侧边屏幕2最短距离大于等于L8时，电子设备确定侧边屏幕2的触控区域2位于虎口接触面702和虎口接触面704之间。如图39F所示，当虎口接触面702和虎口接触面704与侧边屏幕2最短距离小于L8时，电子设备确定侧边屏幕2均为非控区域2。其中，触控区域2与两个虎口接触面的最短距离均等于距离9。
在本申请的一些实施例中，如图39G所示，电子设备确定一个侧边屏幕的包括两个虎口接触面，电子设备确定用户双手横向握持电子设备。然后，电子设备确定该侧边屏幕均为非触控区域。
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备确定电子设备处于横屏状态，且一个侧边屏幕包括两个虎口接触面，电子设备确定用户双手横向握持电子设备。然后，电子设备确定该侧边屏幕均为非触控区域。
情况12：
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备包括两个侧边屏幕，其中，一个侧边屏幕包括两个手指搭握接触面，另一个侧边屏幕包括两个虎口接触面，电子设备确定用户双手横向握持电子设备。然后，电子设备基于手指搭握接触面与虎口接触面的位置确定各侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域。
在本申请的一些实施例中，示例性的，参考图39A、图39C、图39F和图39G，当侧边屏幕1的左端包括手指搭握接触面701，侧边屏幕1的右端包括手指搭握接触面703，侧边屏幕2的左端包括虎口接触面702，侧边屏幕2右端包括虎口接触面704时，电子设备确定用户双手横向握持电子设备。在一些实施例中，如图39A所示，当手指搭握接触面701和手指搭握接触面703的最短距离大于等于L7，虎口接触面702和虎口接触面704的最短距离大于等于L8时，电子设备确定侧边屏幕1的触控区域1位于手指搭握接触面701和手指搭握接触面703之间，侧边屏幕2的触控区域2位于虎口接触面702和虎口接触面704之间。在一些实施例中，如图39C所示，当手指搭握接触面701和手指搭握接触面703的 最短距离小于L7，虎口接触面702和虎口接触面704的最短距离大于等于L8时，电子设备确定侧边屏幕1均为非触控区域1，侧边屏幕2的触控区域2位于虎口接触面702和虎口接触面704之间。在一些实施例中，如图39F所示，当手指搭握接触面701和手指搭握接触面703的最短距离大于等于L7，虎口接触面702和虎口接触面704的最短距离小于L8时，电子设备确定侧边屏幕1的触控区域1位于手指搭握接触面701和手指搭握接触面703之间，侧边屏幕2均为非触控区域2。其中，触控区域1与两个手指搭握接触面的最短距离等于距离7，触控区域2与两个虎口接触面的最短距离等于距离9。在另一种实现方式中，如图39G所示，电子设备确定侧边屏幕2均为非触控区域2。
在实现方式3中，确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域的具体可以包括但不限于如下情况。
情况13：
针对图6A所示的环绕屏和图7A所示的折叠屏，用户纵向抓握电子设备时，用户手掌的抓握面也包括显示屏幕。示例性的，用户左手纵向抓握时，图41A至图41D示出了用户的手掌与电子设备的背面屏幕的接触面304的示意图。可以理解，由于手掌不是平面的，形成的接触面也可以是不规则的，接触面304也可以是多个独立的接触面组成的，接触面304仅仅是本申请实施例提供的一种示意图，对本申请实施例不构成限定。
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备基于背面屏幕的接触面304的触控信息，确定用户单手纵向握持电子设备，进而可以确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域。
示例性的，如图41A所示，当接触面304的左侧边与显示屏194的顶端的最短距离大于等于L3时，侧边屏幕1包括触控区域1，触控区域1与接触面304的左侧边的最短距离为距离5，触控区域1与侧边屏幕的顶端的距离为距离6。如图41B所示，当接触面304的左侧边与显示屏194的顶端的最短距离小于L3时，侧边屏幕1均为非触控区域1。
类似的，如图41A和图41B所示，当接触面304的右侧边与显示屏194的顶端的最短距离大于等于L3时，侧边屏幕2包括触控区域2，触控区域2与接触面304的左侧边的最短距离为距离5，触控区域2与侧边屏幕的顶端的距离为距离6。如图41C和图41D所示，当接触面304的右侧边与显示屏194的顶端的最短距离小于L3时，侧边屏幕2均为非触控区域2。由图41D可知，接触面304的左侧边与显示屏194的顶端的最短以及接触面304的右侧边与显示屏194的顶端的最短距离均小于L3。这种情况下，侧边屏幕1和侧边屏幕2均为非触控区域。
在本申请的一些实施例中，用户纵向抓握电子设备时，背面屏幕也可以与用户进行信息交互。电子设备还可以基于接触面304的位置确定背面屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域。
示例性的，如图41E所示，当接触面304与显示屏194顶端的最短距离大于等于L4时，背面屏幕包括触控区域3，触控区域3与接触面304的沿电子设备长边的最短距离为距离11。如图41F所示，当接触面304与显示屏194顶端的最短距离小于L4时，背面屏幕均为非触控区域。
本申请实施例中，距离1、距离3、距离5、距离7和距离9中的任意两个参数可以相等，也可以不相等；距离2、距离4、距离6、距离7和距离8中的任意两个参数可以相等，也可以不相等；L1、L2、L3、L4、L5和L6中的任意两个参数可以相等，也可以不相等； L7和L8可以相等，也可以不相等。此处均不作具体限定。
本申请实施例中，L1也可以被称为第一预设值，L2也可以被称为第二预设值，L5也可以被称为第三预设值，L6也可以被称为第四预设值，L7也可以被称为第五预设值，L8也可以被称为第六预设值。
由图29可知，用户未握持电子设备时，作用于侧边屏幕的触控操作1可以触发功能1，作用于侧边屏幕的触控操作2可以触发功能2。本申请实施例中，电子设备基于用户的握持接触面确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域后，电子设备仅对作用于侧边屏幕的触控区域的触摸操作进行响应。
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备的侧边屏幕显示有控件，电子设备基于用户的握持接触面确定侧边屏幕的触控区域，调整上述控件显示在侧边屏幕的触控区域内。电子设备检测到作用于触控区域内的上述控件的触控操作1，响应于上述触控操作1，启动该触控操作1触发的功能1。
示例性的，如图42所示，电子设备基于用户的握持接触面确定侧边屏幕的触控区域后，调整侧边屏幕的控件框201显示在侧边屏幕的触控区域内。
在另一种实现方式中，电子设备的侧边屏幕没有显示控件，电子设备基于用户的握持接触面确定侧边屏幕的触控区域。电子设备可以基于触控操作2在侧边屏幕的触控区域的触控轨迹、触控时长等，识别触摸操作2，从而确定并启动该触摸操作2触发的功能2。
可以理解，用户握持电子设备时，电子设备基于用户的握持接触面确定侧边屏幕的触控区域，侧边屏幕的触控区域可以与用户进行信息交互，提供侧边屏幕的预设功能，即触发预设功能的触控操作需要作用于侧边屏幕的触控区域。
下面介绍如何确定侧边接触面的类型。
示例性的，如图44所示，是本申请实施例提供的屏幕的触摸传感上侧边接触面的电容示意图。图44中颜色越深的坐标点表示电容信号值越强。不同类型的侧边接触面的触控信息的特征不同。
需要说明的是，正常触控操作的手指点击接触面具有如下特征：接触面中心的电容信号最强，边缘的电容信号较弱；接触面呈现椭圆形；接触面的宽度较小，且接触面的宽度和接触面的高度的差异小。例如，宽度为3个坐标点的宽度，高度为3个坐标点的高度。如图44所示，侧边接触面中的手指搭握接触面具有如下特征：接触面的电容信号的特征和形状类似于上述手指点击接触面；相较于上述手指点击接触面，用户握持移动终端形成手指搭握接触面时的按压力度更大，因此，该接触面的面积更大，且该接触面触摸时长更长。例如，宽度为3个坐标点的宽度，高度为4个坐标点的高度。
侧边接触面中的大鱼际接触面具有如下特征：接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容信号最强，离上述显示屏侧边越远电容信号越弱，且信号变化趋势较平滑；接触面形状呈现长条形；接触面的高度较大，且与接触面的宽度的差异较大。例如，宽度为3个坐标点的宽度，高度为12个坐标点的高度。
侧边接触面中的手指抓握接触面具有如下特征：相较手指点击接触面，该接触面中最靠近侧边屏幕的最边缘坐标列的电容信号较弱，离上述显示屏侧边越远电容信号越弱，且 信号变化趋势大；接触面形状呈现长条形；相较手指点击接触面，该接触面的宽度较小；相较大鱼际接触面，该接触面的高度较小。例如，宽度为2个坐标点的宽度，高度为4个坐标点的高度。
侧边接触面中的虎口接触面具有如下特征：类似于大鱼际接触面，接触面中最靠近侧边屏幕的最边缘坐标列的电容信号最强，离上述显示屏侧边越远电容信号越弱，且信号变化趋势较平滑；接触面形状呈现长条形；相较大鱼际接触面，该接触面的高度较小。例如，宽度为3个坐标点的宽度，高度为6个坐标点的高度。
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备可以利用神经网络对侧边接触面的类型进行训练，进而可以识别侧边接触面的类型。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中，接触面的宽度为该接触面沿移动终端的短边的最大长度，接触面的高度为该接触面沿移动终端的长边的最大长度。接触面的最边缘坐标列为移动终端的触控屏上接触面对应的触控屏阵列中最接近移动终端的长边的坐标列。接触面的次边缘坐标列为移动终端的触控屏上接触面对应的触控屏阵列中最接近移动终端的长边的第二列坐标列。
本申请实施例中，电容信号强度也可以被称为电容值；接触面也可以被称为接触区域。
此外本申请实施例中，为了避免汗水等物体在触控屏上带来的干扰，电子设备根据接触面的触控信息，可以先排除触控屏上的接触面中的干扰接触面。在一些实施例中，电子设备可以确定电容信号平均值小于等于第一阈值的接触面为干扰接触面。在一些实施例中，电子设备可以确定面积小于等于第二阈值的接触面为干扰接触面。在一些实施例中，电子设备可以确定电容信号平均值小于等于第一阈值且面积小于等于第二阈值的接触面为干扰接触面。
在本申请的一些实施例中，电子设备可以基于侧边接触面的触控信息的特征确定接触面的类型。本申请实施例中，侧边接触面的类型包括但不限于大鱼际接触面、手指点击接触面、手指抓握接触面具和虎口接触面。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当侧边接触面的触控信息满足第一预设条件时，确定该接触面为大鱼际接触面。
在一种实现方式中，所述第一预设条件为侧边接触面的高度大于第一高度阈值。在一种实现方式中，所述第一预设条件为侧边接触面的高度大于第一高度阈值，且侧边接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容信号强度和次边缘坐标列的电容信号强度的比值在第一比值范围内，其中，第一比值范围内的取值大于等于1。在一种实现方式中，所述第一预设条件为侧边接触面的高度和侧边接触面的宽度的比值大于第一高度比值，且侧边接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容信号强度和次边缘坐标列的电容信号强度的比值在第一比值范围内，其中，第一比值范围内的取值大于等于1。在一种实现方式中，所述第一预设条件为侧边接触面的高度和宽度的比值大于第一高度比值，且侧边接触面的面积大于第一面积阈值。在一种实现方式中，所述第一预设条件为侧边接触面的高度和宽度的比值大于第一高度比值，侧边接触面的面积大于第一面积阈值，且侧边接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容信号强度和次边缘坐标列的电容信号强度的比值在第一比值范围内，其中，第一比值范围内的取值大于等于1。
例如，第一高度比值等于5；第一比值范围为大于1小于等于1.1；高度阈值为6个坐 标点的高度，第一面积阈值为15个坐标点的面积。
在一些实施例中，接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容信号强度指接触面的最边缘坐标列中所有坐标点的电容信号强度平均值；接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容信号强度指接触面的次边缘坐标列中所有坐标点的电容信号强度平均值。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当侧边接触面的触控信息满足第二预设条件时，确定该接触面为手指抓握接触面。
在一种实现方式中，第二预设条件为侧边接触面的高度在第一高度范围内，侧边接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容信号强度和次边缘坐标列的电容信号强度的比值在第二比值范围内，其中，第二比值范围内的取值大于1。在一种实现方式中，第二预设条件为侧边接触面的高度在第一高度范围内，侧边接触面的高度和宽度的比值在第三比值范围内。在一种实现方式中，第二预设条件为侧边接触面的高度在第一高度范围内，侧边接触面的高度和宽度的比值在第三比值范围内，且侧边接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容信号强度和次边缘坐标列的电容信号强度的比值在第二比值范围内，其中，第二比值范围内的取值大于1。在一种实现方式中，第二预设条件为侧边接触面的面积在第一面积范围内，侧边接触面的高度和宽度的比值在第三比值范围内，且侧边接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容信号强度和次边缘坐标列的电容信号强度的比值在第二比值范围内，其中，第二比值范围内的取值大于1。
在本申请的一些实施例中，第一高度范围内的取值小于第一高度阈值；第二比值范围内取值大于等于第一比值范围内的取值；第三比值范围内的取值小于第一高度比值；第一面积范围内的取值小于第一面积阈值。
例如，第一高度范围为3至5个坐标点的高度，第一比值范围为大于1.1小于等于1.3；第三比值范围为2至3，第一面积范围为6至12个坐标点的面积。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当侧边接触面的触控信息满足第三预设条件时，确定该接触面为手指搭握接触面。
在一种实现方式中，第三预设条件为侧边接触面的高度在第二高度范围内，侧边接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容信号强度和次边缘坐标列的电容信号强度的比值在第四比值范围内，其中，第四比值范围内的取值小于1。在一种实现方式中，第二预设条件为侧边接触面的高度在第二高度范围内，侧边接触面的高度和宽度的比值在第五比值范围内。在一种实现方式中，第二预设条件为侧边接触面的高度在第三高度范围内，侧边接触面的高度和宽度的比值在第五比值范围内，且侧边接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容信号强度和次边缘坐标列的电容信号强度的比值在第四比值范围内，其中，第四比值范围内的取值小于1。在一种实现方式中，第三预设条件为侧边接触面的面积在第二面积范围内，侧边接触面的高度和宽度的比值在第五比值范围内，且侧边接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容信号强度和次边缘坐标列的电容信号强度的比值在第四比值范围内，其中，第四比值范围内的取值小于1。
在本申请的一些实施例中，第二高度范围内的取值小于第一高度阈值；第五比值范围内的取值小于第一高度比值，且第五比值范围内的取值小于等于第三比值范围内的取值；第二面积范围内的取值小于第一面积阈值。在一种实现方式中，第二高度范围等于第一高度范围。
例如，第二高度范围为3至5个坐标点的高度，第一比值范围为大于0.8小于等于1； 第三比值范围为1至2，第二面积范围为4至12个坐标点的面积。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当侧边接触面的触控信息满足第四预设条件时，确定该接触面为虎口接触面。
在一种实现方式中，第四预设条件为侧边接触面的高度在第三高度范围内，侧边接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容信号强度和次边缘坐标列的电容信号强度的比值在第六比值范围内，其中，第六比值范围内的取值大于1。在一种实现方式中，第四预设条件为侧边接触面的高度在第三高度范围内，侧边接触面的高度和宽度的比值在第七比值范围内。在一种实现方式中，第四预设条件为侧边接触面的高度在第三高度范围内，侧边接触面的高度和宽度的比值在第七比值范围内，且侧边接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容信号强度和次边缘坐标列的电容信号强度的比值在第六比值范围内，其中，第六比值范围内的取值大于1。在一种实现方式中，第四预设条件为侧边接触面的面积在第三面积范围内，侧边接触面的高度和宽度的比值在第七比值范围内，且侧边接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容信号强度和次边缘坐标列的电容信号强度的比值在第六比值范围内，其中，第六比值范围内的取值大于1。
在本申请的一些实施例中，第三高度范围内的取值小于等于第一高度阈值，第三高度范围内的取值大于等于第一高度范围内的取值，且大于等于第二高度范围内的取值；第六比值范围内取值小于等于第二比值范围内的取值；第七比值范围内的取值小于第一高度比值，且大于等于第五比值范围内的取值；第三面积范围内的取值大于等于第二面积范围内的取值，且大于等于第三面积范围内的取值。在一种实现方式中，第六比值范围等于第一比值范围。
例如，第三高度范围为4至8个坐标点的高度，第六比值范围为大于1小于等于1.1；第七比值范围为1至3，第二面积范围为6至15个坐标点的面积。
除了上述识别接触面类型的方式，本申请实施例还可以通过其他实现方式识别接触面类型，本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。
下面介绍本申请实施例提供一种触控区域的调整方法。示例性的，如图43所示，该方法包括但不限与步骤S201至步骤S205。
S201、电子设备接收作用于电子设备的触控屏上的第一触摸输入。
S202、电子设备确定第一触摸输入的第一接触面，并获取第一接触面的触控信息。
S203、基于第一接触面的触控信息，电子设备在电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域；其中，第一触控区域与第一接触面的距离为第一距离值，第一非触控区域包括第一接触面。
S204、电子设备接收作用于第一触控区域的第二触模输入；电子设备响应于第二触模输入，显示第一用户界面。
S205、电子设备接收作用于第一非触控区域的第三触模输入；电子设备响应于第三触模输入，电子设备的显示内容未发生变化。
需要说明的是，参考图37A至图41F，第一触摸输入可以是用户的手握持电子设备的触摸输入，第一接触面可以是用户的手握持电子设备时，与触控屏形成的接触区域。参考图37A至图40D，第一接触面可以是用户的手与侧边屏幕形成的侧边接触面，参考图41A 至图41D，第一接触面还可以是用户的手与背面屏幕形成的接触面。
在本申请的一些实施例中，第一接触面位于触控屏的第一侧边屏幕，基于第一接触面的触控信息，电子设备在第一侧边屏幕上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，第一侧边屏幕中第一触控区域之外的区域为第一非触控区域。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第一接触面的触控信息满足第一预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为大鱼际接触面；参考图37A、图37C、图40A和图40C，当大鱼际接触面与第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离大于等于第一预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于第一侧边屏幕的第一端和大鱼际接触面之间。其中，参考图37A和图37C，第一侧边屏幕可以是所示的侧边屏幕1，第一触控区域可以是触控区域1；参考图40A和图40C，第一侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕2，第一触控区域可以是触控区域2；一侧边屏幕的第一端可以是电子设备的顶端；第一预设值可以是L1；第一距离值可以是距离1。
在一些实施例中，第一侧边屏幕的第一端还可以是第一侧边屏幕的顶端或底端。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第一接触面的触控信息满足第二预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为手指抓握接触面，第一接触面是与电子设备的顶端最近的手指抓握接触面；参考图37A和图37B，当手指抓握接触面与第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离大于等于第二预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于第一侧边屏幕的第一端和手指抓握接触面之间。其中，第一侧边屏幕可以是图37A和图37B所示的侧边屏幕2，第一触控区域可以是触控区域2；第一侧边屏幕的第一端可以是电子设备的顶端；第二预设值可以是L2；第一距离值可以是距离3。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第一接触面的触控信息满足第三预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为手指搭握接触面；参考图38A和图38B，当手指搭握接触面与第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离大于等于第三预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于第一侧边屏幕的第一端和手指抓握接触面之间。其中，第一侧边屏幕可以是图38A和图38B所示的侧边屏幕1，第一触控区域可以是触控区域1；第一侧边屏幕的第一端可以是电子设备的顶端或底端；第三预设值可以是L5；第一距离值可以是距离7。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第一接触面的触控信息满足第四预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为虎口接触面；参考图38A和图38C，当手指搭握接触面与第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离大于等于第四预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于第一侧边屏幕的第一端和手指抓握接触面之间。其中，参考图38A，第一侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕1，第一触控区域可以是触控区域1；参考图38C，第一侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕2，第一触控区域可以是触控区域2；第一侧边屏幕的第一端可以是电子设备的顶端或底端；第四预设值可以是L6；第一距离值可以是距离9。
其中，第一预设条件、第二预设条件、第三预设条件和第四预设条件可以参考前述实施例，此处不再赘述。
在本申请的一些实施例中，参考图41A至图41D，第一接触面位于触控屏的背面屏幕；当第一接触面的第一边与触控屏的第一侧边屏幕的顶端的距离大于等于第七预设值时，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕的第一触控区域位于第一侧边屏幕的顶端和第一侧边之间；第一边相邻于第一侧边屏幕，第一接触面与第一边的距离为第一距离值。其中，参考图41A和 图41C，第一侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕1，第一触控区域可以是触控区域1；参考图41B，第一侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕2，第一触控区域可以是触控区域2；第一侧边屏幕的第一端可以是电子设备的顶端；第七预设值可以是L3；第一距离值可以是距离5。
在一些实施例中，参考图29，电子设备显示在侧边屏幕显示控件框201。参考图42，电子设备基于触控屏上接触面的触控信息确定侧边屏幕的触控区域，并调整控件框201显示位置在触控区域内。图42所示的触控区域可以被称为第一触控区域，图42所示的触控区域可以接收用户作用于控件框201的控件(例如控件201A)的第二触模输入；电子设备响应于第二触模输入，可以显示控件201A触发的第一用户界面。图42所示的非触控区域可以被称为第一非触控区域，电子设备接收作用于图42所示的非触控区域的第三触模输入，电子设备的显示内容不会发生变化。在另一种实现方式中，电子设备的侧边屏幕没有显示控件，电子设备基于第一接触面确定侧边屏幕的第一触控区域和第一非触控区域。针对作用于第一触控区域的第二触摸操作，电子设备可以执行第二触摸操作触发的功能，例如显示第一用户界面。针对作用于第一非触控区域的第三触摸操作，电子设备不执行第三触摸操作对应的功能，电子设备的显示内容不发生变化。
在本申请的一些实施例中，第一接触面位于触控屏的第一侧边屏幕。步骤S203之前还包括步骤S206。
S206、电子设备确定第一触摸输入的第二接触面，并获取第二接触面的触控信息，第二接触面位于第一侧边屏幕。
步骤S203具体可以包括：基于第一接触面的触控信息和第二接触面的触控信息，电子设备在第一侧边屏幕上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，第一触控区域与第二接触面的距离为第一距离值。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第一接触面的触控信息和第二接触面的触控信息均满足第三预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为手指搭握接触面。参考图39A和图39B，当两个手指搭握接触面距离大于等于第五预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于两个手指搭握接触面之间。其中，第一侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕1，第一触控区域可以是触控区域1；第五预设值可以是L7；第一距离值可以是距离7。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第一接触面的触控信息和第二接触面的触控信息均满足第四预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为虎口接触面。参考图39A和图39C，当两个虎口接触面距离大于等于第六预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于两个虎口接触面之间。其中，第一侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕2，第一触控区域可以是触控区域2；第六预设值可以是L8；第一距离值可以是距离9。
在本申请的一些实施例中，第一接触面位于触控屏的第一侧边屏幕。步骤S203之前还包括步骤S207。
S207、电子设备确定第一触摸输入的第五接触面，并获取第五接触面的触控信息，第五接触面位于触控屏的第二侧边屏幕。
步骤S203具体可以包括：电子设备基于第一接触面的触控信息，在第一侧边屏幕上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，并基于第五接触面的触控信息，在第二侧边屏幕上确定出第二触控区域和第二非触控区域；第二触控区域与第五接触面的距离为第二距离值， 第一侧边屏幕中第一触控区域之外的区域为第一非触控区域，第二侧边屏幕中第二触控区域之外的区域为第二非触控区域。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第一接触面的触控信息满足第一预设条件，第五接触面的触控信息满足第二预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为大鱼际接触面，第五接触面的类型为手指抓握接触面；参考图37A，当大鱼际接触面与第一侧边屏幕的顶端的距离大于等于第一预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于第一侧边屏幕的顶端和大鱼际接触面之间，当手指抓握接触面与第二侧边屏幕的顶端的距离大于等于第二预设值时，电子设备确定第二触控区域位于第二侧边屏幕的顶端和手指抓握接触面之间。其中，第一侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕1，第一触控区域可以是触控区域1，第二侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕2，第二触控区域可以是触控区域2；第一预设值可以是L1，第二预设值可以是L2；第一距离值可以是距离1，距离1等于距离2。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第一接触面和第五接触面的触控信息均满足第二预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面和第五接触面的类型均为大鱼际接触面；参考图40A，当大鱼际接触面501与第一侧边屏幕的顶端的距离大于等于第一预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于第一侧边屏幕的顶端和大鱼际接触面之间，当大鱼际接触面502与第二侧边屏幕的顶端的距离大于等于第一预设值时，电子设备确定第二触控区域位于第二侧边屏幕的顶端和大鱼际接触面之间。其中，第一侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕1，第一触控区域可以是触控区域1，第二侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕2，第二触控区域可以是触控区域2；第一距离值可以是距离1。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第一接触面的触控信息满足第三预设条件，第五接触面的触控信息满足第四预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为手指搭握接触面，第五接触面的类型为虎口接触面；参考图37A，当大鱼际接触面与第一侧边屏幕的顶端的距离大于等于第三预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于第一侧边屏幕的顶端和大鱼际接触面之间，当手指抓握接触面与第二侧边屏幕的顶端的距离大于等于第四预设值时，电子设备确定第二触控区域位于第二侧边屏幕的顶端和手指抓握接触面之间。其中，第一侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕1，第一触控区域可以是触控区域1，第二侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕2，第二触控区域可以是触控区域2；第三预设值可以是L5，第四预设值可以是L6；第一距离值可以是距离7，距离7等于距离9。
在本申请的一些实施例中，第一接触面位于触控屏的第一侧边屏幕。步骤S203之前还包括步骤S208。
S207、电子设备确定第一触摸输入的第六接触面，并获取第六接触面的触控信息，第六i接触面位于触控屏的第二侧边屏幕。
步骤S203具体可以包括：电子设备基于第一接触面的触控信息，在第一侧边屏幕上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，基于第六接触面的触控信息，确定第二侧边屏幕为非触控区域。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第一接触面的触控信息满足第一预设条件，第五接触面的触控信息满足第二预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为大鱼际接触面，第五接触面的类型为手指抓握接触面。参考图37A，当大鱼际接触面与第一侧边屏幕的顶端的 距离大于等于第一预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于第一侧边屏幕的顶端和大鱼际接触面之间，当手指抓握接触面与第二侧边屏幕的顶端的距离小于第二预设值时，电子设备确定第二侧边屏幕为非触控区域。其中，第一侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕1，第一触控区域可以是触控区域1，第二侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕2；第一预设值可以是L1，第二预设值可以是L2；第一距离值可以是距离1。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第一接触面和第五接触面的触控信息均满足第二预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面和第五接触面的类型均为大鱼际接触面；参考图40A，当大鱼际接触面501与第一侧边屏幕的顶端的距离大于等于第一预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于第一侧边屏幕的顶端和大鱼际接触面之间，当大鱼际接触面502与第二侧边屏幕的顶端的距离小于第一预设值时，电子设备确定第二侧边屏幕为非触控区域。其中，第一侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕1，第一触控区域可以是触控区域1，第二侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕2；第一距离值可以是距离1。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第一接触面的触控信息满足第三预设条件，第五接触面的触控信息满足第四预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为手指搭握接触面，第五接触面的类型为虎口接触面；参考图37A，当大鱼际接触面与第一侧边屏幕的顶端的距离大于等于第三预设值时，电子设备确定第一触控区域位于第一侧边屏幕的顶端和大鱼际接触面之间，当手指抓握接触面与第二侧边屏幕的顶端的距离小于第四预设值时，电子设备确定第二侧边屏幕为非触控区域。其中，第一侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕1，第一触控区域可以是触控区域1，第二侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕2；第三预设值可以是L5，第四预设值可以是L6；第一距离值可以是距离7。
在本申请的一些实施例中，步骤203之后，所述方法还包括步骤S208至步骤S211。
S208、电子设备接收作用于触控屏上的第四触摸输入。
S209、电子设备确定第四触摸输入的第三接触面，并获取第三接触面的触控信息。
S210、基于第三接触面的触控信息，电子设备确定触控屏上的第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域。
S211、电子设备接收作用于第一侧边屏幕的第五触模输入；电子设备响应于第五触模输入，电子设备的显示内容未发生变化。
示例性的，第五触摸输入为双击操作。参考图30A和图30B，侧边屏幕均为触控区域时，针对作用于侧边屏幕的第五触摸输入，电子设备可以显示音量调整框。而电子设备基于第三接触面的触控信息，确定侧边屏幕为非触控区域后，针对作用于侧边屏幕的第五触摸输入，电子设备的显示内容不发生变化。
参考图37A至图41D，第四触摸输入可以是用户握持电子设备时的触摸输入。参考图37A至图40D，第三接触面可以是用户的手与侧边屏幕形成的侧边接触面，参考图41A至图41D，第三接触面还可以是用户的手与背面屏幕形成的接触面。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第一接触面的触控信息满足第一预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为大鱼际接触面；参考图37B，当大鱼际接触面与第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离小于第一预设值时，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域。其中，第一侧边屏幕可以是所示的侧边屏幕1；第一侧边屏幕的第一端可以是电子设备的顶端；第一 预设值可以是L1。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第一接触面的触控信息满足第二预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为手指抓握接触面，第一接触面是与电子设备的顶端最近的手指抓握接触面；参考图37D，当手指抓握接触面与第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离小于第二预设值时，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域。其中，第一侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕2；第一侧边屏幕的第一端可以是电子设备的顶端；第二预设值可以是L2。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第一接触面的触控信息满足第三预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为手指搭握接触面；当手指搭握接触面与第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离小于第三预设值时，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第一接触面的触控信息满足第四预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为虎口接触面；当手指搭握接触面与第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离小于第四预设值时，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域。
在本申请的一些实施例中，步骤S210之前，上述方法还包括步骤S212。
S212、电子设备确定第四触摸输入的第四接触面，并获取第四接触面的触控信息，第四接触面位于第一侧边屏幕。
步骤S210具体可以包括：基于第三接触面的触控信息和第四接触面的触控信息，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域。
可以理解，基于位于一个侧边屏幕的两个接触面的触控信息，电子设备可以确定该侧边屏幕全部为非触控区域，有效降低了误触风险。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第三接触面的触控信息和第四接触面的触控信息均满足第三预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为手指搭握接触面。参考图39C和图39D，当两个手指搭握接触面距离小于第五预设值时，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域。其中，第一侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕1；第五预设值可以是L7。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当第一接触面的触控信息和第二接触面的触控信息均满足第四预设条件时，电子设备确定第一接触面的类型为虎口接触面。参考图39A和图39C，当两个虎口接触面距离小于第六预设值时，电子设备确定第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域。其中，第一侧边屏幕可以是侧边屏幕2；第五预设值可以是L8。
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的硬件系统。
在本申请的一些实施例，示例性的，如图45所示，该硬件系统可以包括触摸传感器61、显示屏62、触控芯片63、图形处理器(graphics processing unit，GPU)64、应用处理器(application processor，AP)65。该显示屏62可以是前述实施例中的显示屏194，触摸传感器61可以是前述实施例中的触摸传感器180K，在此不再赘述。
该触摸传感器61可用于检测触摸操作所产生的电容信号，并将用户的触摸操作所产生的电容信号上传至触控芯片63。具体的，参见图7B的相关实施例，触摸传感器61可以检测电容阵列的电容信号，并向触控芯片63发送上述电容阵列的电容信号。
触控芯片63基于触摸传感器61检测到的电容矩阵上的所有电容信号，可以确定出满足触摸条件的电容信号。例如，触摸条件可以为电容值信号强度大于阈值1。在本申请的一些实施例中，触控芯片63将满足触摸条件的电容信号以及该电容信号的坐标点上报给应 用处理器65。基于上述电容信号的坐标点，应用处理器65可以调用防误触算法，来确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域。然后应用处理器65基于触控芯片63上报的位于触控区域内的坐标点进行事件识别及响应。
可以理解，触控芯片63过滤掉电容值信号强度小于等于阈值1的电容信号，将电容值信号强度大于阈值1的电容信号上报给应用处理器65，可以避免无效的干扰信号。
在本申请的一些实施例中，触控芯片63确定满足触摸条件的电容信号和该电容信号的坐标点。基于上述电容信号的坐标点，触控芯片63可以调用防误触算法，确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域。触控芯片63向应用处理器65上报位于触控区域内的坐标点，应用处理器65基于触控芯片63上报的坐标点进行事件识别及响应。
在本申请实施例中，电子设备的软件系统可以采用分层架构，事件驱动架构，微核架构，微服务架构，或云架构。本申请实施例以分层架构的Android系统为例，示例性说明电子设备的软件结构。
参见图46，图46示出了本申请实施例示例性提供的电子设备的软件结构框图。该电子设备可以在通过用户在握持电子设备的接触面的触控信息，确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域，从而有效降低了用户与侧边屏幕交互过程中的误操作风险，提升了用户的使用体验。
如图46所示，分层架构将软件分成若干个层，每一层都有清晰的角色和分工。层与层之间通过软件接口通信。在一些实施例中，可以将Android系统从上至下分为应用程序框架层，硬件抽象层(hardware abstraction layer，HAL)层以及内核层(kernel)。其中：
应用程序层包括一系列应用程序包，例如智能家居，蓝牙，WLAN等等。还可以包括相机，图库，通话，音乐，视频等应用程序。
应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(application programming interface，API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。
Android Runtime包括核心库和虚拟机。Android runtime负责安卓系统的调度和管理。
核心库包含两部分：一部分是java语言需要调用的功能函数，另一部分是安卓的核心库。
应用程序层和应用程序框架层运行在虚拟机中。虚拟机将应用程序层和应用程序框架层的java文件执行为二进制文件。虚拟机用于执行对象生命周期的管理，堆栈管理，线程管理，安全和异常的管理，以及垃圾回收等功能。
内核层是硬件和软件之间的层。内核层可以包含显示驱动，传感器驱动、触控IC驱动，还可以包括摄像头驱动，音频驱动等等。HAL层及内核层(kernel)可以响应于应用程序框架层调用的功能，执行对应的操作。
在本申请的一些实施例中，当触摸传感器61接收到触摸操作，相应的硬件中断被发给触控芯片，触控芯片63将触摸操作的触摸信息1发送给内核层的触控芯片驱动。触摸信息1包括用户握持电子设备的侧边接触面的坐标点。内核层将触摸信息1通过路径(1)发送给触控屏进程(TP Daemon)；TP Daemon通过路径(2)调用触控屏算法1(TP Algorithm)获取触摸信息1的特征信息；TP Daemon通过路径(3)调用防误触算法，基于上述特征信息确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域，进而确定触摸信息1中非触控区域以外的有效的触摸 信息2；TP Daemon通过路径(4)向触控芯片驱动发送触摸信息2；触控芯片驱动通过路径(5)向输入系统发送触摸信息2。应用程序框架层通过路径(6)从输入系统获取触摸信息2，识别触摸信息2对应的应用功能，进而启动该应用功能。例如，触摸信息2对应侧边屏幕的触控区域的双击事件，应用程序框架层通过调用内核层启动显示驱动，通过显示屏194显示音量调整框202。
在一些实施例中，TP Daemon通过路径(3)调用防误触算法，基于上述特征信息确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域时，防误触算法通过路径(7)向横竖屏检测模块获取电子设备的横竖屏状态，防误触算法基于上述特征信息和电子设备的横竖屏状态，确定侧边屏幕的触控区域和非触控区域，进而确定触摸信息1中非触控区域以外的有效的触摸信息2。
本申请实施例中所描述的各种说明性的逻辑单元和电路可以通过通用处理器，数字信息处理器，专用集成电路(ASIC)，现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或其它可编程逻辑装置，离散门或晶体管逻辑，离散硬件部件，或上述任何组合的设计来实现或操作所描述的功能。通用处理器可以为微处理器，可选地，该通用处理器也可以为任何传统的处理器、控制器、微控制器或状态机。处理器也可以通过计算装置的组合来实现，例如数字信息处理器和微处理器，多个微处理器，一个或多个微处理器联合一个数字信息处理器核，或任何其它类似的配置来实现。
本申请实施例中所描述的方法或算法的步骤可以直接嵌入硬件、处理器执行的软件单元、或者这两者的结合。软件单元可以存储于RAM存储器、闪存、ROM存储器、EPROM存储器、EEPROM存储器、寄存器、硬盘、可移动磁盘、CD-ROM或本领域中其它任意形式的存储媒介中。示例性地，存储媒介可以与处理器连接，以使得处理器可以从存储媒介中读取信息，并可以向存储媒介存写信息。可选地，存储媒介还可以集成到处理器中。处理器和存储媒介可以设置于ASIC中，ASIC可以设置于UE中。可选地，处理器和存储媒介也可以设置于UE中的不同的部件中。
应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质，(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘Solid State Disk(SSD))等。
本说明书的各个部分均采用递进的方式进行描述，各个实施例之间相同相似的部分互相参见即可，每个实施例重点介绍的都是与其他实施例不同之处。尤其，对于装置和系统实施例而言，由于其基本相似于方法实施例，所以描述的比较简单，相关之处参见方法实施例部分的说明即可。
尽管已描述了本申请的优选实施例，但本领域内的技术人员一旦得知了基本创造性概念，则可对这些实施例做出另外的变更和修改。所以，所附权利要求意欲解释为包括优选实施例以及落入本申请范围的所有变更和修改。
本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到本申请实施例中的技术可借助软件加必需的通用硬件平台的方式来实现。基于这样的理解，本申请实施例中的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品可以存储在存储介质中，如ROM/RAM、磁碟、光盘等，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例或者实施例的某些部分所述的方法。
本说明书中各个实施例之间相同相似的部分互相参见即可。尤其，对于实施例而言，由于其基本相似于方法实施例，所以描述的比较简单，相关之处参见方法实施例中的说明即可。
以上所述的本申请实施方式并不构成对本申请保护范围的限定。

Claims (17)

  1. 一种触控区域调整方法，其特征在于，包括：
    电子设备接收作用于所述电子设备的触控屏上的第一触摸输入；
    所述电子设备确定所述第一触摸输入的第一接触面，并获取所述第一接触面的触控信息，所述触控信息包括电容信息；
    基于所述第一接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备在所述电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域；其中，所述第一触控区域与所述第一接触面的距离为第一距离值，所述第一非触控区域包括所述第一接触面；
    所述电子设备接收作用于所述第一触控区域的第二触模输入；
    所述电子设备响应于所述第二触模输入，显示第一用户界面；
    所述电子设备接收作用于所述第一非触控区域的第三触模输入；
    所述电子设备响应于所述第三触模输入，所述电子设备的显示内容未发生变化。
  2. 根据所述权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一接触面位于所述触控屏的第一侧边屏幕，所述基于所述第一接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备在所述电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，包括：
    基于所述第一接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备在所述第一侧边屏幕上确定出所述第一触控区域和所述第一非触控区域；所述触控信息还可以包括接触面的高度、接触面的宽度、接触面的面积中的一或多项，所述第一侧边屏幕中所述第一触控区域之外的区域为所述第一非触控区域。
  3. 根据所述权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一接触面位于所述触控屏的第一侧边屏幕，所述基于所述第一接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备在所述电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域之前，还包括：
    所述电子设备确定所述第一触摸输入的第二接触面，并获取所述第二接触面的触控信息，所述第二接触面位于所述第一侧边屏幕；
    所述基于所述第一接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备在所述电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，包括：
    基于所述第一接触面的触控信息和所述第二接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备在所述第一侧边屏幕上确定出所述第一触控区域和所述第一非触控区域，所述第一触控区域与所述第二接触面的距离为第一距离值；所述触控信息还可以包括接触面的高度、接触面的宽度、接触面的面积中的一或多项，所述第一侧边屏幕中所述第一触控区域之外的区域为所述第一非触控区域。
  4. 根据所述权利要求1至3任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基于所述第一接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备在所述电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域之后，所述方法还包括：
    所述电子设备接收作用于所述触控屏上的第四触摸输入；
    所述电子设备确定所述第四触摸输入的第三接触面，并获取所述第三接触面的触控信息；所述第三接触面位于所述触控屏上的第一侧边屏幕；所述触控信息还可以包括接触面的高度、接触面的宽度、接触面的面积中的一或多项；
    基于所述第三接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备确定所述触控屏上的第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域；
    所述电子设备接收作用于所述第一侧边屏幕的第五触模输入；
    所述电子设备响应于所述第五触模输入，所述电子设备的显示内容未发生变化。
  5. 根据所述权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基于所述第三接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备确定所述触控屏上的第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域之前，还包括：
    所述电子设备确定所述第四触摸输入的第四接触面，并获取所述第四接触面的触控信息，所述第四接触面位于所述第一侧边屏幕；
    所述基于所述第三接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备确定所述触控屏上的第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域，包括：
    基于所述第三接触面的触控信息和所述第四接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备确定所述第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域。
  6. 根据所述权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基于所述第一接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备在所述第一侧边屏幕上确定出所述第一触控区域和所述第一非触控区域，包括：
    当所述第一接触面的触控信息满足第一预设条件时，所述电子设备确定所述第一接触面的类型为大鱼际接触面；
    当所述第一接触面与所述第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离大于等于第一预设值时，所述电子设备确定所述第一触控区域位于所述第一侧边屏幕的第一端和所述第一接触面之间；
    所述第一预设条件为接触面的高度大于第一高度阈值，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第一比值范围内；
    或者，所述第一预设条件为接触面的高度大于第一高度阈值，接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值大于第一高度比值，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在所述第一比值范围内；
    或者，所述第一预设条件为接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值大于所述第一高度比值，接触面的面积大于第一面积阈值，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在所述第一比值范围内；
    其中，所述第一比值范围内的取值大于等于1，接触面的最边缘坐标列为所述触控屏上接触面对应的触控屏阵列中最接近所述电子设备的长边的坐标列；接触面的次边缘坐标列为所述触控屏上接触面对应的触控屏阵列中最接近所述电子设备的长边的第二列坐标列。
  7. 根据所述权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基于所述第一接触面的触控信 息，所述电子设备在所述第一侧边屏幕上确定出所述第一触控区域和所述第一非触控区域，包括：
    当所述第一接触面的触控信息满足第二预设条件时，所述电子设备确定所述第一接触面的类型为手指抓握接触面；
    当所述第一接触面与所述第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离大于等于第二预设值时，所述电子设备确定所述第一触控区域位于所述第一侧边屏幕的第一端和所述第一接触面之间；所述第一接触面为与所述第一侧边屏幕的第一端最近的手指抓握接触面；
    所述第二预设条件为接触面的高度在第一高度范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第二比值范围内；
    或者，所述第二预设条件为接触面的高度在第一高度范围内，接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在第三比值范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在所述第二比值范围内；
    或者，所述第二预设条件为接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在所述第三比值范围内，接触面的面积在第一面积范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在所述第二比值范围内；
    其中，所述第一高度范围内的取值小于等于所述第一高度阈值，所述第二比值范围内的取值大于等于1，所述第二比值范围内的取值大于等于所述第一比值范围内的取值，所述第三比值范围内的取值小于等于所述第一高度比值，所述第一面积范围内的取值小于等于所述第一面积阈值。
  8. 根据所述权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基于所述第一接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备在所述第一侧边屏幕上确定出所述第一触控区域和所述第一非触控区域，包括：
    当所述第一接触面的触控信息满足第三预设条件时，所述电子设备确定所述第一接触面的类型为手指搭握接触面；
    当所述第一接触面与所述第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离大于等于第三预设值时，所述电子设备确定所述第一触控区域位于所述第一侧边屏幕的第一端和所述第一接触面之间；
    所述三预设条件为接触面的高度在第二高度范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第四比值范围内；
    或者，所述第三预设条件为接触面的高度大于第二高度范围，接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在第五比值范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在所述第四比值范围内；
    或者，所述第三预设条件为接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在所述第五比值范围内，接触面的面积在第二面积范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在所述第四比值范围内；
    其中，所述第二高度范围内的取值小于等于第一高度阈值，所述第四比值范围内的取值小于等于1，所述第五比值范围内的取值小于等于所述第三比值范围内的取值，所述第二面积范围内的取值小于等于所述第一面积阈值。
  9. 根据所述权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基于所述第一接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备在所述第一侧边屏幕上确定出所述第一触控区域和所述第一非触控区域，包括：
    当所述第一接触面的触控信息满足第四预设条件时，所述电子设备确定所述第一接触面的类型为虎口接触面；
    当所述第一接触面与所述第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离大于等于第四预设值时，所述电子设备确定所述第一触控区域位于所述第一侧边屏幕的第一端和所述第一接触面之间；
    所述第四预设条件为接触面的高度在第三高度范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第六比值范围内；
    或者，所述第四预设条件为接触面的高度大于第三高度范围，接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在第七比值范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在所述第六比值范围内；
    或者，所述第四预设条件为接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在所述第七比值范围内，接触面的面积在第三面积范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在所述第六比值范围内；
    其中，所述第三高度范围内的取值小于等于第一高度阈值，所述第三高度范围内的取值大于等于所述第二高度范围内的取值，所述第六比值范围内的取值大于等于1，所述第六比值范围内的取值小于等于所述第二比值范围内的取值，所述第七比值范围内的取值小于等于所述第一高度比值，所述第七比值范围内的取值大于等于所述第五比值范围内的取值，所述第三面积范围内的取值小于等于所述第一面积阈值。
  10. 根据所述权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基于所述第一接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备在所述电子设备的第一侧边屏幕上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，包括：
    当所述第一接触面的触控信息和所述第二接触面的触控信息均满足第三预设条件时，所述电子设备确定所述第一接触面的类型为手指搭握接触面；
    当所述第一接触面与所述第二接触面的距离大于等于第五预设值时，所述电子设备确定所述第一触控区域位于所述第一接触面和所述第二接触面之间；
    所述三预设条件为接触面的高度在第二高度范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第四比值范围内；
    或者，所述第三预设条件为接触面的高度大于第二高度范围，接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在第五比值范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在所述第四比值范围内；
    或者，所述第三预设条件为接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在所述第五比值范围内，接触面的面积在第二面积范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在所述第四比值范围内；
    其中，所述第四比值范围内的取值小于等于1。
  11. 根据所述权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基于所述第一接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备在所述电子设备的第一侧边屏幕上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，包括：
    当所述第一接触面的触控信息和所述第二接触面的触控信息均满足第四预设条件时，所述电子设备确定所述第一接触面的类型为虎口接触面；
    当所述第一接触面与所述第二接触面的距离大于等于第六预设值时，所述电子设备确定所述第一触控区域位于所述第一接触面和所述第二接触面之间；
    所述第四预设条件为接触面的高度在第三高度范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第六比值范围内；
    或者，所述第四预设条件为接触面的高度大于所述第三高度范围，接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在第七比值范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在所述第六比值范围内；
    或者，所述第四预设条件为接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在所述第七比值范围内，接触面的面积在第三面积范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在所述第六比值范围内；
    其中，所述第六比值范围内的取值大于等于1，所述第三高度范围内的取值大于等于所述第二高度范围内的取值，所述第七比值范围内的取值大于等于所述第五比值范围内的取值，所述第三面积范围内的取值大于等于所述第二面积范围内的取值。
  12. 根据所述权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三接触面位于所述触控屏的第一侧边屏幕；所述基于所述第三接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备确定所述触控屏上的第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域，包括：
    当所述第三接触面的触控信息满足第一预设条件，且所述第三接触面与所述第一侧边屏幕的第一端的距离小于第一预设值时，所述电子设备确定所述第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域；
    所述第一预设条件为接触面的高度大于第一高度阈值，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第一比值范围内；
    或者，所述第一预设条件为接触面的高度大于第一高度阈值，接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值大于第一高度比值，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在所述第一比值范围内；
    或者，所述第一预设条件为接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值大于所述第一高度比值，接触面的面积大于第一面积阈值，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在所述第一比值范围内；
    其中，所述第一比值范围内的取值大于等于1。
  13. 根据所述权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基于所述第三接触面的触控信息和所述第四接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备确定所述第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域， 包括：
    当所述第三接触面的触控信息和所述第四接触面的触控信息均满足第三预设条件，且所述第三接触面和所述第四接触面的距离小于第五预设值时，所述电子设备确定所述第一侧边屏幕为非触控区域；
    所述三预设条件为接触面的高度在第二高度范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在第四比值范围内；
    或者，所述第三预设条件为接触面的高度大于所述第二高度范围，接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在第五比值范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在所述第四比值范围内；
    或者，所述第三预设条件为接触面的高度和接触面的宽度的比值在所述第五比值范围内，接触面的面积在第二面积范围内，且接触面的最边缘坐标列的电容值和接触面的次边缘坐标列的电容值的比值在所述第四比值范围内；
    其中，所述第四比值范围内的取值小于等于1。
  14. 根据所述权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一接触面位于所述电子设备的背面屏幕；所述基于所述第一接触面的触控信息，所述电子设备在所述电子设备的触控屏上确定出第一触控区域和第一非触控区域，包括：
    当所述第一接触面的第一边与所述触控屏的所述第一侧边屏幕的顶端的距离大于等于第七预设值时，所述电子设备确定所述第一侧边屏幕的所述第一触控区域位于所述第一侧边屏幕的顶端和所述第一侧边之间；所述第一边相邻于所述第一侧边屏幕，所述第一接触面与所述第一边的距离为第一距离值，所述第一侧边屏幕中所述第一触控区域之外的区域为所述第一非触控区域。
  15. 根据所述权利要求6至9和权利要求12中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一侧边屏幕的第一端为所述第一侧边屏幕的顶端；或者，所述第一侧边屏幕的第一端为所述第一侧边屏幕的顶端或所述第一侧边屏幕的底端。
  16. 一种电子设备，包括：触控屏，存储器，一个或多个处理器，以及一个或多个程序；其中，所述一个或多个程序被存储在所述存储器中；其特征在于，所述一个或多个处理器在执行所述一个或多个程序时，使得所述电子设备实现如权利要求1至15任一项所述的方法。
  17. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如权利要求1至15任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2020/133997 2019-12-09 2020-12-04 一种触控区域调整方法及装置 WO2021115210A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US17/783,407 US11907526B2 (en) 2019-12-09 2020-12-04 Touch region adjustment method and apparatus for determining a grasping gesture of a user on an electronic device
JP2022534818A JP7478238B2 (ja) 2019-12-09 2020-12-04 タッチ領域調整方法及び機器
EP20899176.0A EP4050465A4 (en) 2019-12-09 2020-12-04 TOUCH CONTROL REGION ADJUSTMENT APPARATUS AND METHOD

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201911251873 2019-12-09
CN201911251873.9 2019-12-09
CN202010982063.7A CN113031802A (zh) 2019-12-09 2020-09-17 一种触控区域调整方法及装置
CN202010982063.7 2020-09-17

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021115210A1 true WO2021115210A1 (zh) 2021-06-17

Family

ID=76328834

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/133997 WO2021115210A1 (zh) 2019-12-09 2020-12-04 一种触控区域调整方法及装置

Country Status (3)

Country Link
US (1) US11907526B2 (zh)
EP (1) EP4050465A4 (zh)
WO (1) WO2021115210A1 (zh)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113986047A (zh) * 2021-12-23 2022-01-28 荣耀终端有限公司 识别误触信号的方法和装置
US11531426B1 (en) 2021-10-29 2022-12-20 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Edge anti-false-touch method and apparatus, electronic device and computer-readable storage medium
USD1018524S1 (en) * 2020-01-20 2024-03-19 Compal Electronics, Inc. Notebook computer

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114968140A (zh) * 2021-02-23 2022-08-30 北京小米移动软件有限公司 获取传感器数据的方法及装置、终端、存储介质
JP2023032324A (ja) * 2021-08-26 2023-03-09 アルプスアルパイン株式会社 非接触入力装置
EP4343526A1 (en) 2021-12-08 2024-03-27 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Electronic device supporting one-handed operation mode, and operating method for electronic device

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103995668A (zh) * 2014-05-14 2014-08-20 联想(北京)有限公司 一种信息处理方法和电子设备
CN104571919A (zh) * 2015-01-26 2015-04-29 深圳市中兴移动通信有限公司 终端屏幕显示方法及装置
US20160004377A1 (en) * 2013-03-05 2016-01-07 Zte Corporation Capacitive Touch Screen Terminal and Input Method Therefor
CN106569713A (zh) * 2016-10-31 2017-04-19 努比亚技术有限公司 一种触控区域调整装置、方法及终端
CN107678592A (zh) * 2017-09-30 2018-02-09 联想(北京)有限公司 一种触摸控制方法、装置及设备
EP3514667A1 (en) * 2016-11-03 2019-07-24 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Method and terminal for preventing false touch

Family Cites Families (22)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP5372000B2 (ja) 2007-10-11 2013-12-18 エヌ−トリグ リミテッド デジタイザのためのジェスチャ検出
US8456430B2 (en) 2009-08-21 2013-06-04 Motorola Mobility Llc Tactile user interface for an electronic device
TWI478041B (zh) * 2011-05-17 2015-03-21 Elan Microelectronics Corp 於觸控面板上識別手掌區域方法及其更新方法
CN102999198B (zh) 2011-09-16 2016-03-30 宸鸿科技(厦门)有限公司 触摸面板边缘持握触摸的检测方法和装置
US9785278B2 (en) 2013-08-22 2017-10-10 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Display device and touch-operation processing method
CN104679358B (zh) * 2013-11-27 2019-02-26 华为终端（东莞）有限公司 一种终端
KR102199806B1 (ko) 2013-12-05 2021-01-07 삼성전자주식회사 곡형 디스플레이 모듈을 갖는 전자 장치 및 그 운용 방법
CN104020878A (zh) 2014-05-22 2014-09-03 小米科技有限责任公司 触摸输入控制方法及装置
TWI526952B (zh) * 2014-08-21 2016-03-21 義隆電子股份有限公司 電容式觸控裝置及其物件辨識方法
KR102255143B1 (ko) * 2014-09-02 2021-05-25 삼성전자주식회사 벤디드 디스플레이를 구비한 휴대 단말기의 제어 방법 및 장치
CN104615303B (zh) 2015-01-30 2018-02-23 努比亚技术有限公司 移动终端防误触方法及移动终端
US9804717B2 (en) 2015-03-11 2017-10-31 Synaptics Incorporated Input sensing and exclusion
WO2016183796A1 (zh) * 2015-05-19 2016-11-24 华为技术有限公司 一种用于识别用户操作模式的方法及移动终端
ITUA20161686A1 (it) 2016-03-15 2017-09-15 Pierluigi Ansaldi Impianto lavavetri per veicoli
US10739927B2 (en) 2016-10-11 2020-08-11 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Operation detection method and apparatus, and mobile terminal
CN106855785A (zh) 2016-12-16 2017-06-16 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 一种双手握持时实现屏幕防误触的方法、装置及移动终端
CN106681638B (zh) 2016-12-16 2019-07-23 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 一种触摸屏控制方法、装置及移动终端
CN106708263A (zh) 2016-12-16 2017-05-24 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 一种触摸屏的防误触方法、装置及移动终端
CN106873895A (zh) 2016-12-30 2017-06-20 努比亚技术有限公司 一种边缘手势操作的实现方法及装置
CN107577372A (zh) 2017-09-06 2018-01-12 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 边缘触控方法、装置及移动终端
WO2019071571A1 (zh) 2017-10-13 2019-04-18 华为技术有限公司 信息处理方法、相关设备及计算机存储之介质
CN109782944A (zh) 2018-12-11 2019-05-21 华为技术有限公司 一种触摸屏的响应方法及电子设备

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20160004377A1 (en) * 2013-03-05 2016-01-07 Zte Corporation Capacitive Touch Screen Terminal and Input Method Therefor
CN103995668A (zh) * 2014-05-14 2014-08-20 联想(北京)有限公司 一种信息处理方法和电子设备
CN104571919A (zh) * 2015-01-26 2015-04-29 深圳市中兴移动通信有限公司 终端屏幕显示方法及装置
CN106569713A (zh) * 2016-10-31 2017-04-19 努比亚技术有限公司 一种触控区域调整装置、方法及终端
EP3514667A1 (en) * 2016-11-03 2019-07-24 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Method and terminal for preventing false touch
CN107678592A (zh) * 2017-09-30 2018-02-09 联想(北京)有限公司 一种触摸控制方法、装置及设备

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
USD1018524S1 (en) * 2020-01-20 2024-03-19 Compal Electronics, Inc. Notebook computer
US11531426B1 (en) 2021-10-29 2022-12-20 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Edge anti-false-touch method and apparatus, electronic device and computer-readable storage medium
EP4174620A1 (en) * 2021-10-29 2023-05-03 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Edge anti-false-touch method, electronic device and computer-readable storage medium
CN113986047A (zh) * 2021-12-23 2022-01-28 荣耀终端有限公司 识别误触信号的方法和装置
CN113986047B (zh) * 2021-12-23 2023-10-27 荣耀终端有限公司 识别误触信号的方法和装置

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2023504923A (ja) 2023-02-07
US20230012245A1 (en) 2023-01-12
EP4050465A1 (en) 2022-08-31
EP4050465A4 (en) 2022-12-28
US11907526B2 (en) 2024-02-20

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021115210A1 (zh) 一种触控区域调整方法及装置
JP7391102B2 (ja) ジェスチャ処理方法およびデバイス
WO2020134869A1 (zh) 电子设备的操作方法和电子设备
WO2020224449A1 (zh) 一种分屏显示的操作方法及电子设备
EP4024829B1 (en) Volume adjustment method and electronic device
WO2020182065A1 (zh) 快捷功能启动的方法及电子设备
WO2020119493A1 (zh) 一种触摸屏的响应方法及电子设备
CN113645351B (zh) 应用界面交互方法、电子设备和计算机可读存储介质
JP7403641B2 (ja) タッチスクリーン、電子デバイス、および表示制御方法
EP3907592A1 (en) Method for moving application icons, and electronic device
WO2021057343A1 (zh) 一种对电子设备的操作方法及电子设备
WO2021063098A1 (zh) 一种触摸屏的响应方法及电子设备
WO2021082564A1 (zh) 一种操作提示的方法和电子设备
WO2021078032A1 (zh) 用户界面的显示方法及电子设备
CN110658975B (zh) 一种移动终端操控方法及装置
WO2021052407A1 (zh) 一种电子设备操控方法及电子设备
WO2021082815A1 (zh) 一种显示要素的显示方法和电子设备
WO2021057699A1 (zh) 具有柔性屏幕的电子设备的控制方法及电子设备
CN111596781A (zh) 一种防误触方法及一种终端
WO2020221062A1 (zh) 一种导航操作方法及电子设备
WO2021052015A1 (zh) 一种触控屏控制方法和电子设备
CN110058729B (zh) 调节触摸检测的灵敏度的方法和电子设备
CN113391775A (zh) 一种人机交互方法及设备
CN113031802A (zh) 一种触控区域调整方法及装置
JP7478238B2 (ja) タッチ領域調整方法及び機器

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20899176

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020899176

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20220523

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022534818

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE